Only this pageAll pages
Powered by GitBook
Couldn't generate the PDF for 326 pages, generation stopped at 100.
Extend with 50 more pages.
1 of 100

English

Loading...

Work Manager

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Viewing Deleted Emails

You can view the unhandled incoming emails which were deleted by you / your team as part of dealing with them with the 'Deletion Audit' section of Unhandled Emails. This helps with an auditing how incoming emails which were unhandled have been dealt with.

Clicking on this 'Deletion Audit' link will bring up a view of all deleted unhandled emails within your area of the business. These are incoming unhandled emails where the decision was made to delete these mails rather than create a new Case or Ticket from them.

All filters and paging options are available as for the other email views in this page, but the emails themselves are shown in read-only mode..

Clicking on a deleted unhandled email will display the email in detail in the main section of the screen, with any attachments that it may have had.

Additionally, the header bar above the mail shows who deleted the email and when.

Note: You cannot 'undelete' emails which have been deleted, however if you wish to copy body text information from them you can do this by simply selecting the desired text and copying / Ctrl-C.

Work Manager

In this section you'll find lots of explainers and videos teaching you how to use Enate's Work Manager software to manage your business processes day-to-day.

Work Manager Overview

Work Manager is a web-based, multi-page application used by members of the service delivery team to interact with Tickets, Cases and Actions running through managed business processes.

Users of Work Manager are service users, team leaders, operations managers and executives. Work Manager provides a standard set of views for these users to carry out work.

Watch this video for a quick overview of Work Manager:

Enate Homepage Dashboard Overview Dialogue

Your Work Manager Home screen is where you'll land when you log into Enate. Let’s have a look at what you can see and do on it.

Along the top of the screen, you’ll see a variety of menu and click through buttons.

On the far left, there’s a drop-down menu that, depending on your permissions, allows you to click through to other views such as Builder, Queues, Advanced Search, the Contact Management screen, your Email inboxes and Insights view. At the bottom you can click to return to any Recently accessed work items.

Next to that you’ve a menu for manually creating new Cases or Tickets when necessary. You can create these individually for a customer, or use Bulk create to upload from an excel list.

To the right of that you’ve the Quick find search bar. Here you can search for any contacts, work items, communications or files within the system, using free text search as well as additional filters for each item type.

Browser Support

Work Manager is designed to support the following Browsers:

  • Latest version of Chrome (at time of release)

  • Latest version of Firefox (at time of release)

  • Latest version of the Microsoft Edge, based on Chromium (at time of release).

User Roles in Work Manager

Enate allows a granular level of granting access to people based on their role and business requirements. These settings are defined in the User Management section of Builder.

Every user has a Work Manager role assigned to them. The role has a number of access options configured for it which determine what they can see and do in Enate.

Enate provides two standard, pre-configured roles for Work Manager:

  • Team Member - this is for users who process Tickets, Actions & Cases and who report to a Team Leader. This role gives them access to work assigned to them, their team (people who report to the same Team Leader as they do) and work that is in the Queues that they work out of, but has fewer levels of access than the Team Leader role.

  • Team Leader - this is for senior members who manage a Team and oversee Queues. This role gives them access to set up and maintain their teams and Queues, to assign work to others, as well as to more advanced features such as creating customized reports.

This article provides a full breakdown of access options for Team Member and Team Leader roles.

If a standard role doesn't quite fit the bill, you can create custom roles that allow you to fine-tune levels of access to give users the exact combination of access levels they need.

Custom roles might be particularly useful in the following circumstances:

  • Senior Team Members - You may wish to create a custom role for your more senior team members which falls part-way between the standard 'Team Leader' and 'Team Member' roles, giving them access to some Team Leader-like features without needing to have them fulfil that role entirely.

  • Junior Team Members - You may wish to create a custom role for your more junior team members which gives them access to some 'Team Member'-like features while hiding other aspects of the system until they gain more experience

You can also give some Work Manager users access to Enate's Builder application, for example so that they can view local processes. You do this by assigning them a Builder role, .

Users are also able to view which roles their team members have in Work Manager - will bring up their user profile which includes information such as their role title, its description (if one has been added), as well as a list showing which features that the user has access to.

If you find yourself needing to change the levels of access for yourself or users in your team, speak to your system admin.

Blocked Email Addresses

This is where you are able to easily add, edit and delete email addresses to be blocked.

Disable auto-generated emails when creating a new Ticket from this address - the system will allow Tickets to be created for emails arriving from this address but will not send any auto-generated emails out to the address.

Disable auto-generated emails when creating a new Ticket/Case from this address - the system will allow Tickets and/or Cases to be created for emails arriving from this address but will not send any auto-generated emails out to the address.

Auto-reject emails from this address as spam - the system will allow Tickets to be created for emails arriving from this address but once created, the Ticket will be automatically moved to a state of Closed with a resolution method of 'Rejected as Spam'. As Cases do not have a 'Rejected' status, any email from a blocked address will be automatically moved to your 'Unhandled email' section of your email page, rather than creating any work item.

Quickfind Searches with Custom Data Fields

You can search for work items and their emails using focussed ‘search this value in this field’ on the work item. This is achieved by prepending the search with predefined search code. Before typing anything into Quickfind, the dropdown displays all short codes available in the system, and the field they relate to.

To search against a field, enter the short code and the desired value e.g. hq:Laptop

This will return work item (Ticket/Case/Action) and communication results where this field has this value:

You can put quote marks around your search value to search for an entire phrase as the field value you want to find e.g.: bn:“entire phrase”

You can also use this approach to search for phrases with general free text searching, i.e. even when you are not searching against a custom field with a prepended short code.

Home Page

The Home page allows Team Leaders and Team Members to view the work for their area of business, i.e. Work Items sitting in their work Queues and with their Team Members (both human and robot).

The Home page has three main areas:

  • Due date totals — a row of color-coded counts (green, orange, red, grey) showing how many of your work items are on track, due today, overdue, or have no due date set. Click any count to filter the grid to that group.

  • Bar chart — the chart breaks down your work by a chosen attribute (e.g. Queue, Process Name, Assigned To). Click a bar to filter the grid to that segment.

Canned Texts

Canned Texts are standard pre-configured texts which are created as part of system configuration.

When writing an email, you can insert a Canned Text by clicking on the Canned Texts icon at the bottom of a write an email screen. This will show you all canned texts available for the Service Line and you can use the free text search function to filter items by title.

You can also use the ‘recently used’ option by clicking on the dropdown list, allowing you to quickly access a more relevant canned text. You can also manually modify canned texts after they have been inserted into your email.

Show by Language

You can also select a canned text in a different language by clicking on the language in the dropdown list.

Hi, welcome to Enate Help

This is your one stop shop for learning about how to use Enate - it's packed full of useful explainers and videos to help you cover everything you need to know.

Here's a breakout of the various sections of Enate's online help and what you'll find in them..

Work Manager is Enate's operations environment where Team Members, Team Leaders and Operations Managers go to manage and deliver service. In this section you'll find lots of explainers and videos teaching you how to use the software day-to-day.

Enate's Work Manager Help is available in 9 languages including , , , , , , & .

Wanting to get up to speed with mapping and running your business processes in Enate? Check out the Builder help section here.

see here for more information
clicking on a team member from the Team Bar

Emails

Team Bar - Viewing Your Team

Processing an Action

Processing a Ticket

On the right-hand side, there's an 'unhandled emails' icon showing how many unhandled emails there are to go process, and a link to the unhandled email inbox.

The Insights icon which brings up the Insights pop-up to let you note down information about your working time.

The Focus list link shows your list of specific Cases & Tickets you want to keep an eye on, and the Notifications icon brings up any notifications you've been sent.

There's then a feedback icon for product suggestions, and your user profile link gives access to useful external links, your log out link and to see and adjust various personal settings.

Below the top bar you’ve your homepage dashboards and work item grid.

At the top, you see work item totals, split by their delivery status. These are color-coded counts showing how many of your work items are on track, due today, overdue, or have no due date set. Click any count to filter your grid down to that group.

Below that, you see a bar chart which breaks down work items by an attribute of your choosing. Something like splitting by Queue, Process, or Customer. Click a bar label to filter down grid results and even click on an individual bar segment to filter further. Current filters are shown as labels above the grid - you can unfilter them at any point.

Below the chart is your grid. This is the full list of your work items. You can sort it, filter it, and customize which columns it shows.

You can switch your grid between four views: Your Work Inbox for things that sit with you and can be actioned right now, your Owned Work for things waiting or paused, then the equivalent Inbox and Owned Work views for your entire TEAM.

On the right-hand side of the screen, you'll see the Team Bar, which shows all your Team and how many Work Items they currently have assigned. Team Leaders may also see a Bots section to show what automated resources are working on. And the 'Unassigned Work' section shows work item volumes sitting in your queues which aren't assigned to anyone yet.

The headline activity for the Home page is to focus on items sitting in overdue or due today statuses. Work in those states which are not yet assigned to someone to work on should be of particular priority to attend to.

Grid — the full list of work items in your current view (Work Inbox, Owned Work, Team Work Inbox, or Team Owned Work). You can sort, filter, and customize the columns shown.

For full details on how to use the bar chart and grid, see Bar Chart and Grid.

The work items you will see on your homepage are:

  • Work Items that are assigned to you

  • Work Items that are assigned to your manager, i.e. the person you report to (if you have one)

  • Work Items that are assigned to your peers (people managed by the same person as you)

  • Work Items in a Queue that you are a member of / are a manager of

Additionally, as a Team Leader you will see:

  • Work Items that are assigned to people you manage (i.e. people who report to you)

  • Work Items that are assigned to people managed by people you manage (recursively down the hierarchy of manager relationships)

  • Work Items in a Queue that you manage, even if you are not a member of it

Click here to see how to set the users who report to you (i.e. your Team), and Queues which you manage.

Enate's Work Manager provides you with embedded reporting capabilities, driven by Microsoft's Power BI reporting platform, which gives you lots of additional information at your disposal to gain new insights and support for your business operations. Check out this section to see the standard Reports available to you in the system.

If you want to know more about the information available in the Data Warehouse for creating your own BI, check out this Check out the BI section to view details of the Data Dictionary, with field data types and definition. This also highlights foreign and primary keys to join tables on.

Enate Integration Services - Enate has teamed up with one of the leading iPaaS vendors SnapLogic to offer iPaaS as part of the Enate platform for clients that do not already have their own iPaaS, or are seeking a more business user friendly solution.

Additionally, Enate has an extensive library of APIs, Webhooks, and integration capabilities with RPA & OCR systems. Check out the Enate Integrations section for information on this as well as Enate's extension points like Custom Card code.

Information for Enate implementation and Academy Training

💻 Work Manager - For End Users

🛠️ Builder - For Configurers and Business Analysts

Spanish
French
German
Brazilian Portuguese
Russian
Polish
Hungarian
Romanian
💻Work Manager
🛠️Builder

📈 For Analysts & BI Developers

⚡ For Integrators

🚀 For Implementers

Reports
Enate BI
Enate Integration Services powered by SnapLogic
Enate Integrations
Enate Implementations

Using Quotes to search for entire phrases

Note: Any files linked to the canned text section will also be attached at the same time.

Note: The system will show the canned text in your language by default.

Splitting a Ticket

If a Ticket contains multiple separate queries / questions which are better managed separately you can split the Ticket. Click on the Split tab in the Activities tabs to start the split:

The screen will default split into two Tickets. You can manually add more splits if you wish by clicking on the '+' icon. The Title, Description and Context (Customer >> Ticket Category etc.) are copied from the current Ticket, but all can be modified. You can choose to keep each separate Ticket with you.

Confirm the Ticket split by clicking the button in the Info card:

After splitting, the original Ticket will be set to ‘Wait– split Ticket’ with links to the new Tickets the original was split into.

Once the split Tickets are resolved and the feedback window if they have one has expired, this original Ticket will be set to fully complete.

For SLA purposes the start date of the original Ticket is copied to each of the Resulting Tickets and the time when the original Ticket has been marked as Resolved is calculated as the time when the last Ticket it has been split into gets resolved.

For example, if Ticket A has been split into Tickets B and C, and Ticket B is resolved at '2022-02-02 01:10:00' and Ticket C is resolved at '2022-02-03 02:00:00', the time marked for when Ticket A is Resolved will be '2022-02-03 02:00:00'.

You can cancel the splitting of a Ticket at any time by navigating away from the Split tab (the main Action button on the Ticket changes away from ‘Split’, so you can be sure you’re not splitting it).

'Wait for Sub Cases to Complete' Actions

A ‘Wait for Sub Cases to Complete’ Action will wait for a specific Sub Case to reach completion before allowing the Case to move on to the next Action.

You can tell that an Action is a ‘Wait for Sub Cases to Complete’ Action because it will say 'Action is waiting for Sub Case to complete' in the Action's info card.

Once a ‘Wait for Sub Cases to Complete’ Action has been launched AND the Sub Case it has been set to wait for has been launched (either manually or through a 'Start Case' Action), the ‘Wait for Sub Cases to Complete’ Action will move into a state of 'Waiting'.

Once the Sub Case is completed, the 'Wait for Sub Cases to Complete' Action will close automatically.

You will be notified of this in the timeline as well.

If the Sub Case the 'Wait for Sub Cases to Complete’ Action is set to wait for it not available - either because it has not been launched or because it was resolved before the ‘Wait for Sub Cases to Complete’ Action was launched, the ‘Wait for Sub Cases to Complete’ Action will enter a state of 'To Do' and be assigned to a Queue where a user will pick it up and decide how to proceed.

If you then try to set the 'Waiting for Sub Case to Complete' Action to 'Waiting', the Action will close as the Sub Case it is set to wait for hasn't been launched.

If the Action is not in a 'Wait for Sub Cases to Complete' state and the Sub Case for which it is waiting has been completed, a message will appear as 'Sub Case is completed' in the Info Card.

If you manually Resolve a ‘Wait for Sub Case to Complete’ Action, the Action will be marked as Resolved without the Sub Case having completed.

Scheduling Emails

You can schedule the date and time of when an email will be sent by selecting the Schedule Send option.

The scheduled email will appear in the Comms and Timeline tabs, along with who scheduled it and when it has been scheduled for. If the email has been scheduled to send more than 2 minutes later, a 'Send Now' and 'Cancel' button will appear to let you send the scheduled email straight away if you have changed your mind or to cancel sending the scheduled email altogether.

Note that you cannot schedule an email that exceeds the size set in Builder - see here for more information. However, validation of the email size occurs as part of saving the email, not at the sent time. So if a 25MB email has been scheduled and then the maximum email size gets reduced in Builder to 10MB, the scheduled email will still be sent as it conformed to the size allowance configured when it was scheduled.

Working with Linked Work Items

Various features in Enate allow you to manage activities being carried out by different teams, letting you easily create and oversee work items even when you don't have full permissions on each other's work.

Linking Existing Work ItemsCreating New Linked Work ItemsViewing Linked Work ItemsSharing Emails between Linked Work ItemsRelated Group vs Linked Work Items

Manually Launching An Action

Most often the Actions in a Case are started automatically (either by process flow or based on schedules). However, if an Action has been configured to be manually startable, you can do this from the Case.

Select the ‘Start Action’ tab in the Activities section. In the resulting panel, choose the Action type to launch (must have been configured as manually startable in Builder), set a due date and specify how many of the Action you wish to launch. Specify the Action instructions if you wish these to be different from the default instructions displayed.

Hit ‘Start Action’ to confirm. The Action List will automatically refresh to display the new Action that you have just created and a confirmation message will be displayed.

The tab will not close upon launching the new Action, as this is an additive activity which does not modify the current Case.

Getting New Work

Clicking the Pull from Queue button in the Work Inbox grid header will assign you a new piece of work, if any is available for you.

How does the system determine which work item to give a user when they click the “Pull from Queue” button on their Work Inbox?

The system works by looking at all unassigned work items from all of the Queues the user is linked to, and has permissions on, and assigns one new work item, prioritising items as follows:

  1. Any currently OVERDUE work item (most overdue item first). If none found, then

Communications

Email traffic in and out of the operation - volumes, trends and which processes drive the most correspondence.

Communications tab.

KPI cards

  • Incoming Emails - emails received from customers or external parties.

  • Outgoing Emails - emails sent out.

Overview of Work Item Types

There are three types of Work Item in Enate:

  • – Used for modelling single-part activities, e.g. queries. Tickets are standalone and are not part of a business process. Can be promoted to become a specific type of Case.

  • – Used for modelling multi-part activities (i.e. business processes).

Thank You Emails - automated closure/acknowledgement emails sent when work is resolved.

  • Unhandled Emails - emails received but not yet linked to a work item or actioned. A growing number signals a communication backlog.

  • Visuals

    • Volume Trend - Incoming vs Outgoing - incoming vs outgoing volumes over time, each type on its own line; drills month → week → day.

    • By Process - email volume per process, each bar split by email type - shows which processes generate the most correspondence.


    Communications

    Work Item Overview

    Processing a Case

    – the constituent parts of a Case, i.e. a Case is made up of a flow of Actions. Contains a set of instructions, often a checklist of activities to track progress within the Action. These can be manual (can be carried out by humans and bots) or automatic Actions, e.g. auto sending an email.
    Tickets
    Cases
    Actions
    Any work item which has been rejected by a Robot. If none found, then
  • Any work item (item due soonest selected first).

  • Pull from Queue Allocation Rules

    Note: Queues set to ‘strict mode’ are there to allocate work strictly to robots. Any human users linked to such queues are there only as a fall back for rejected robot work items, and aren’t auto-allocated the normal, unrejected work items from them when hitting “Pull from Queue”.

    Please note that if your system has been configured to auto-close a 'Wait for Sub Case to complete' Action (see here for more information about how to do that) and the Sub Case the 'Wait for Sub Cases to Complete’ Action is set to wait for is not available - either because it has not been launched or because it was resolved before the ‘Wait for Sub Cases to Complete’ Action was launched, the ‘Wait for Sub Cases to Complete’ Action will automatically move to a state of Closed. You will be notified of this in the timeline.

    Note:

    • You do not need to have the Case assigned to you in order to launch a new Action.

    • This option is also available from any of the Actions within the Case.

    'Trigger External API' Actions

    Details around how to configure actions to trigger external APIs, and how they will display in Work Manager for operational users.

    Similar to other action archetypes, 'Trigger External API' actions can be used in Case processes, and are used for when you need to automatically call out to another system, passing data to it and potentially getting the external system to pass updated custom data back into Enate.

    For information on how to configure 'Trigger External API' Actions check out this Builder section.

    Sometimes there can be a delay when waiting for the external system to respond. When that happens, i.e. when the ‘Trigger External API’ Action is waiting for information to come back from an external system, the Action info card will display in Work Manager as being in a state of 'Waiting'.

    When the external system ultimately responds to Enate with the data update, it will be with a marker to say whether it has been successful OR unsuccessful:

    Response with Successful Completion

    If the system is responding to say it has been successful, the Action will automatically move to a state of 'Closed', with a Resolution Method of 'Done Successfully'.

    Response with Unsuccessful Completion

    If the system is responding to say it has been unsuccessful, the Action move into a state of 'To Do', with a reason of 'Updated by Integration'. The external API can also respond with additional information regarding why it was unsuccessful. This information will display in the Info card of the Action in the 'Rejected Reason' section.

    If the Action isn't successful because it did not complete within the time set for it (), then it will moved to a state of 'To Do' with a reason of 'Timeout' and it will allocate to a Queue / human user based on the configured allocation rules.

    Such unsuccessful Actions will now effectively behave as a standard manual action.

    If the Action is not able to connect to the external system, it will automatically retry connecting for a certain number of times, depending on how your system has been configured in Builder (see for more information). You will also be shown an error message bar on the Action showing:

    • when the error occurred

    • when the system will retry establishing a connection automatically

    • how many times the system has automatically retried establishing a connection, and

    • how many times the system will automatically retry establishing a connection.

    You are able to manually retry establishing a connection from here too, by clicking the 'Retry' link in the error message.

    If the Action fails to establish a connection following the automatic retries (e.g. if the retry setting is set to 5 and the system fails to establish a connection following 5 automatic retries), it will move to a state of 'Closed' with a resolution method of 'Not Done Successfully'.

    When the Action receives the required information, it will close automatically.

    If the automatic retry setting in Builder is changed after the system has automatically retried establishing a connection with an external system, the following will occur:

    If, for example, the retry setting was originally set to 5 and the system automatically retried establishing a connection 5 times but failed, the Action will have moved to a state of Closed with an error message showing a retry count of 5/5.

    If the retry setting then gets subsequently increased to anything above 5, for example 7, the error message will display a retry count of 5/7, but the system will NOT automatically retry establishing a connection for a 6th and 7th time as the Action is already closed.

    However, if the Action had not yet moved to a state of Closed because it had not yet reached the maximum number of automatic retries (e.g. it had only retried 4 times out of the 5), then increasing the retry setting to 7 means that the Action will automatically retry establishing connecting until the count has reached 7.

    Conversely, if you reduce the retry setting after retries have started, e.g. you're on retry 4 of 10 but then reduce the max down to 4, the system will still display 4 of 10 but will in fact be closed.

    Team Bar for Team Members

    On the right hand side of the home page is the Team Bar.

    If you are a Team Member, the Team Bar shows you your team and your unassigned work.

    My Team

    At the top of the Team Bar you can see the people in your team and, for each of them:

    • The amount of work they have outstanding (number in centre of pie-chart)

    • The due status of that work (i.e. Red/Amber/Green)

    • Their current availability status (available or offline)

    You can see the availability status of your Team Members - so if they are online or offline.

    The system tracks your active Enate browser session, and so is able to check if they are still logged into Enate.

    An important point is that this available / offline status is for informational purposes only – it is not taken into account as part of any allocation rules - i.e. the ‘Who does it go to?’ settings.

    You can filter the display of your team to show available / offline / all users.

    You can sort your team members by work item status criteria including:

    • Least / Most Work (Total)

    • Least / Most Overdue (Amber)

    • Least / Most Overdue (Red)

    • Least / Most On Target (Green)

    Free text search also allows for you to search for individual users from the list.

    Clicking on a team member from the Team Bar, will bring up their user profile. The grid filters down to show only work items currently assigned to that user.

    The homepage bar chart will be replaced to show the amount of work that is assigned to the user (the number in centre of pie-chart), as well as the due status of that work (i.e. Red/Amber/Green), You will also see the user's profile picture, their role title, its description (if one has been added), and if you click on the 'More about this role' link, you'll see a list showing which features that the user has access to.

    You can close the view and return to the standard bar chart view of all work items by clicking the 'X' icon.

    At the foot of the Team Bar you can see the amount of work which is sitting unassigned in the Queues you manage, grouped by Queue. This includes information about the amount of work in each Queue that is unassigned (the number in centre of pie-chart), as well as the due status of that work (i.e. Red/Amber/Green).

    If you have unassigned work which is overdue – i.e. any red items in this section – you should be looking to deal with that situation.

    Contacts Card

    Overview

    The contacts card in the side panel of Tickets, Cases and Actions is where you can specify the people who relate to the work item and set their contact tags.

    Clicking on an individual record will display the contact detail's information in a new tab showing the Contact Activity Page.

    Auto-population of the contacts card

    Contacts populated from an initial email

    When an email arrives from an address which is associated with a system user or an external contact which has been previously recorded in the system then their details are automatically populated on the contacts tab when the Ticket is created by the system. They will automatically be tagged as the Original Requester Requester, Subject and Primary Contact. These tags can be removed.

    Optionally the first operator to assess the Ticket can also set them as the Primary Contact if deemed appropriated by their assessment. If you tag another contact as any of these relationship types, the tag will be removed from the previous contact.

    Contacts populated from Contact Activity Page

    Similarly, when a work item is created from the 'Start work item' button on the Contact Activity Page of a contact, that contact will be tagged as the Original Requester, Requester, Subject and Primary Contact of the work item.

    You can also add contacts to the work item manually by searching for them in the contacts card.

    If you search for a user in the contacts card that does not exist in the system, you can create a new contact by clicking on the ‘Create Contact’ option and filling in the contact's details.

    If you have written the email address for the contact, the system will decode and auto-populate the first name and last name of the contact. Once you fill in all the information and click on create contact, the system will redirect you back to the work item.

    When you manually add a contact for the first time, they will be as the Primary Contact, Original Requester, Requester and Subject by default. You can manually reassign the Primary Contact, Requester and Subject tags to other users afterwards, but note that the Original Requester tag cannot be changed once it has been set.

    Approval Actions

    What are Approval Actions? How do they work?

    Often within the Case flows of business processes which are built in Enate there are points where external people (i.e. people working outside Enate - this could be business managers within your company or the relevant client company) need to sign off on activities before the process can continue. Payroll processes are good examples of such processes, where client management need to sign off on payroll reports before the process can be allowed to continue.

    Enate's Approval Action is built to specifically support these approval request scenarios in a more integrated way - to ensure that this 'approval cycle' is tightly managed and visible within the flow of activities in Enate.

    How Approval Actions work at Runtime

    Approval requests get sent out to users working externally from Enate to approve or decline.

    There are a few different types of approval that affect how the decision is made:

    • In a multilevel scenario, the request email is sent to each new level upon successful approval from previous, up to a maximum of 3 levels. If any person declines, the approval is declined.

    • In a parallel any scenario, the request email is sent to all approvers and the first decision is taken.

    • In a parallel all scenario, the request email is sent to all approvers and ALL must approve for the request to be approved. If any decline, the approval is declined.

    If the request gets approved by all necessary parties, the approval Action gets successfully resolved and closed automatically, so no Work Manager User will need to pick it up, although the closed Action can always be viewed by manually clicking on it.

    There are, however, a couple of scenarios where a Work Manager user might need to pick up and carry out any required activities to further process an approval Action:

    • The approval has been declined

    • No approvers (or insufficient approvers) have been determined automatically

    In the scenario where an approval request has been declined, the Action will move into a state of 'To Do' and so will ultimately need to be dealt with by a Work Manager User. They should review the approval decline reason provided by the approver and decide how to proceed. They can either:

    1. Update as needed and Resend the request by setting the Action to 'Wait'. This will auto-send out the approval request email again** and place the Action in a state of 'Wait for More Information' - since we're waiting for external information (an approval response) to be registered back into the system before activity can proceed.

    2. Mark the Action as Unable to complete. This will alert the Case owner who then needs to decide how to proceed - perhaps by reworking the Case or closing the Case entirely.

    3. Mark the Action as Resolved which will manually mark the request as approved. The Case with then progress to the next Action.

    In the scenario where a user needs to add in approvers because one or more required approvers is blank (or make changes which result in the approval requests needing to be sent out again), the User will pick up the Approval Action in a state of To Do. Once they have finished making any adjustments and / or filling in missing Approver names, the must then place the Action in a state of Wait. Once they do this will auto-send the approval request email and then move the Action to a state of 'Wait for more information' as it is waiting for external info (approval) before proceeding.

    Another potential scenario is that the approval Action might auto-close because it has timed out as no/insufficient responses were received in time. In this case, the Action will automatically be set to Resolved, and the Case will continue. No Work Manager user will need to pick up an Action in this scenario, although the closed Action can always be viewed by manually clicking on it.

    'Send Email' and 'Send Email and Wait' Actions

    Overview

    'Send Email' Actions involve Enate auto-sending an email and then the Action will immediately close. Work Manager Users should not have to do any work on this type of Action.

    'Send Email and Wait' Actions involve Enate auto-sending an email. The Action will then move to a state of Waiting until a response has been received. Once a response has been received, the Action will move to a state of To Do to be processed further.

    The To address and any CC or BCC addresses on the email are configured in Builder - see this article about how to configure 'Send Email' Actions in Builder:

    Send Email Actions

    Once the email has been sent, an entry will appear in the timeline showing when it was sent, who it sent from and to, any CC or BCC addresses, the email subject and if you click to expand, the email body itself.

    Exceptions

    If an invalid To, CC or BCC email address is used, the email for the Send Email/Send Email and Wait Action will fail to auto-send and the Action will then be moved back to its Queue.

    A warning will appear in the timeline:

    The Case owner can then decide if they want to manually send the email and will need to correct the email address and add the email body manually. They should also contact their system administrator to alert them about the issue so that they can correct the email address to prevent future email failure.

    Converting a Ticket into a Case

    If during the processing of a Ticket query it becomes apparent to you that the request is best handled as a Case, you may choose to convert the Ticket to a Case.'

    To convert a Ticket into a Case, expand the settings card of a Ticket, select 'Convert to Case' and then select the Case process you want to convert the Ticket into.

    The system will then bring up any relevant custom cards for that Case - just fill in any required data and then click on 'Start Case' in the info card.

    If your system has be configured to allow you to override the due date upon Case creation, you can select a new due date here.

    If your system has been configured to set a schedule for a new Case upon creation in work manager, you can select a schedule here.

    You can choose to keep each separate Ticket with you by selecting 'Keep with me' in the settings card and you can choose to send an email to the primary contact for the Ticket informing them that the Ticket has been turned into a Case by selecting the 'Send Automated Emails' option.

    Confirm the Ticket promotion up to a Case by clicking the button in the Info card:

    You will see a confirmation messages informing you that the Ticket will be closed and replaced by a Case (with the same reference number, but a ‘-C’ ending).

    The original Ticket does not form any further part of service delivery and will now be in a state of Waiting with a Resolution Method of 'Case Launched' with a link to that Case.

    The original Ticket will move to a state of Closed when the Case that has been launched is Closed.

    The new Case launched will be in a state of To Do.

    Feedback Features

    Information on how client users can provide feedback to you on specific work items, via feeback links available in the footer of emails sent from Enate.

    Customers can provide feedback via Email links

    If the ‘Allow Feedback’ setting is ticked in the Ticket's Builder settings (see here for more information on how to do this), outgoing emails will contain a footer-based link for recipients to give feedback scores.

    They can do this at any point in the processing of the Ticket. When a client user clicks on any of these links, a browser window will be opened for them showing the Enate Feedback form. It offers the same feedback icons as shown in their email, but allows a user to change their selection should they wish, and also to add an additional comment before submitting.

    All feedback and comments are subsequently stored in Work Manager against this Ticket, for Users to view.

    Further to this, feedback data is stored in the Data Warehouse, allowing longer-term analysis of feedback data (i.e. you can build reports to analyse this data across multiple different criteria).

    Displaying client Feedback details on Tickets for Users to View

    When dealing with a Ticket, if a client user has provided feedback (via the feedback footer links in one of the emails they have received from Enate) Users are able to see the customer’s current feedback rating via the 'smiley face' icon link in the ribbon bar of the Ticket:

    Clicking on this will open a feedback popup displaying the client user's feedback rating/s (via emoticon), along with any associated comments. The overall average rating, between 1 and 5 - calculated when feedback is given multiple times on a single Ticket - is also show at the top of the popup. Latest feedback is shown at the top of the screen.

    Further to this, this feedback data is also stored in the Data Warehouse, allowing longer-term analysis of feedback data (i.e. you can build reports to analyse this data across multiple different criteria).

    Viewing Linked Work Items

    The 'Linked Work' Tab

    The Linked Work tab is where you can view all linked work items of a Ticket or Case.

    Note that Sub-Cases created via the '+ Work item' link will still display in the for the time-being, and do not show in the Links tab.

    Within the Links tab grid you can a list of Linked work item, showing their reference, title, assignee, Queue and due date of a work item.

    There is also an icon to unlink the work item if they have been linked in error.

    You can also expand linked Cases to see their Actions.

    Linked Work Items you don't have permissions on

    If you don't have permissions on a certain business process, the work items from that process will be greyed out and you won't be able to open or edit them. You'll still be able to see higher level information about the work item, e.g. who they're assigned to, which Queue they're in and when they're due.

    Operations Summary

    Operations Summary

    The landing tab and the daily health check for the whole operation. It pulls the single most important number from each of the other tabs into one place, so you can see at a glance whether anything needs attention.

    Operations Summary tab.

    KPI cards

    • Total / Work Items Started - how much work came in during the selected range (cases, actions and tickets).

    • Work Items Open - items started but not yet resolved (status below Closed).

    • Work Items Overdue - open items that have already passed their due date.

    • SLA Compliance - of the items closed in the period, the percentage resolved within their SLA deadline. Higher is better.

    • AHT in Hrs - average handling time per item, from pick-up to completion, shown as HH:MM.

    • Daily Active Users - average number of unique agents logging activity each day.

    Visuals

    • Monthly Volume - Received vs Closed - columns comparing work received against work closed each month. When the closed bar is shorter than the received bar, the backlog is growing. Drills month → week → day.

    • By Process (Top 10) - donut showing which processes generate the most work, top ten by volume.

    • SLA Status - met vs not-met split for the period.

    • Top 10 Agents - Throughput & AHT -

    Sharing Emails between Linked Work Items

    As part of supporting work being carried out across multiple Cases & Tickets, you can share emails between Linked work items to allow them to be viewed more widely. You can even do this for work items which you don't have permissions on.

    You can share emails between linked work items in two ways.

    1. From an existing email - Clicking on the '+' icon at the top of an existing email in the timeline and selecting the relevant work item you wish to share the email with.

    2. From composing new email - Another way is when writing a new email, you can simply add the work item reference number into the To / CC / BCC of an email by clicking the '+' icon, just as you wold when adding an email address:

    You can even use this approach when you just want to share emails between linked work items, without needing to add an email address.

    Please note that you can only share emails between work items that are linked. You cannot share emails between Closed work items. Additionally, once an email has been shared between work items, it cannot be unshared.

    The email will be sent as normal to any emails addresses specified, and it will also be shared with the selected work items.

    When someone responds to the shared email, that response will be attached to both work items.

    Adding a Note

    Click the Note tab to add a note. Anyone can add an internal note to a Ticket, Case or Action – you don’t have to have it assigned to you, and adding a note won’t auto-assign the work to you. These are notes for internal use and the external contacts won’t ever see them.

    Specifying note type

    If desired, you can specify which kind of interaction resulted in the note, e.g. phone incoming / outgoing etc.

    Adding a note and resolving a Ticket

    If we we are adding a note to a Ticket assigned to ourselves, we have the additional option of Adding a Note & Resolving the work item which will resolve the work item when we click on it.

    After adding the note, the screen will refresh with the new note displayed on the timeline.

    Closing an item with incomplete notes

    If you have started to enter a note but have not saved it, the tab will display a ‘*’ marker on the tab alerting you to this.

    If you subsequently try to close the work item tab with this ‘in-progress’ items still unsaved, the system will alert you asking if you wish to proceed.

    Bulk Resolving Tickets and Actions via the Home Page Grid

    When working in Enate, you can use bulk resolve to remove work items from your homepage that shouldn't be there. For example, items created in error or due to spam emails You can bulk resolve multiple Tickets and Actions like this by using the ‘Resolve’ button on your Homepage Grid.

    How to use Bulk Resolve in Enate Dialogue

    Let’s have a look at how to use Bulk Resolve for Tickets and Actions in the Homepage grid.

    You can use Bulk Resolve to move on or clear multiple Tickets and Actions from your Homepage grid in one go. This is often used for clearing items created in error or from spam emails, as well as for other situations.

    To bulk resolve, in your homepage grid select the Tickets or Actions you want to resolve. You can select up to 50 items at a time. If you select more, you'll be asked to deselect some before continuing.

    Once you start selecting, bulk activity options appear at the top of your grid. Click the Resolve button and choose a resolution method. This method will apply to every item you've selected.

    You can only bulk resolve Tickets and Actions that are in a To Do, In Progress, or Wait state. You can't select Cases for bulk resolve.

    If you select an item that's already Resolved, you'll get a warning that it can't be resolved again, and it'll be skipped when the rest are processed. The same happens if you select a Ticket in Draft status.

    How do you use Bulk Resolve?

    The steps to bulk resolve multiple Tickets in your Homepage Grid are as follows:

    • Select which Tickets / Actions you want to resolve, up to 50 items*. *If you select more than this, you’ll get a message asking you to deselect some before continuing.

    • Once you start to select items, the bulk activity options will show at the top of the grid. Click on the ‘Resolve’ button and choose from the Resolution Method Options (This will be applied to all work items being resolved).

    • Upon choosing the resolution method, the selected Tickets/Actions will automatically be marked as resolved and will be removed from the grid.

    Important Points:

    • You cannot select Cases to be bulk resolved.

    • You can only bulk resolve Tickets and Actions that are in a state of To Do, In Progress or Wait.

    • If you select a work item that is already in the status of Resolved, a warning message will appear stating that the ticket is already resolved, can’t be resolved again and will be skipped by the system when it resolves the rest of the Tickets you have selected.

    • Similarly, if you select a Ticket to resolve that is in the status of Draft, a warning message will appear alerting you that the Ticket cannot be resolved and will be skipped by the system when resolving the rest of the Tickets you have selected.

    Tickets: When bulk resolving Tickets, you will be able to choose from four resolution method options, that will be displayed to you in alphabetical order.

    • No Customer Response (This will be the default option)

    • Rejected

    • Rejected as Spam

    • With Custom Response

    Actions: If you are bulk resolving Actions you will only have one default resolution method which is Complete.

    Yes. You will be able to bulk resolve Tickets and Actions from all the inboxes that you can access on your Homepage Grid. These are:

    • Work Inbox

    • Team Work Inbox

    • Owned Work

    • My Team’s Owned Work

    Tickets: Yes - You have the option of adding a single comment that will be applied to all selected Tickets if you choose the No Customer Response, Rejected or Rejected as Spam Resolution Methods. If you choose the With Customer Response Resolution Method, you MUST provide a comment before being able to resolve the Tickets.

    Actions: No - You will not be able to add a resolution comment when bulk resolving Actions.

    You cannot resolve:

    • Tickets that are parents of split Tickets

    • A Ticket that has been converted into a Case.

    This is because these types of Tickets can only be resolved by the completion of their child Work Items. If you select one of these types of Tickets a warning message will be displayed alerting you that these Tickets cannot be resolved in this way, and they will be skipped by the system when it resolves the rest of the Tickets that you have selected.

    Focus List

    The Focus List enables you to put together a list of work items that you want to concentrate on, perhaps as part of a focused daily to-do list, or as a handy shortcut to get to the items you're needing quick access to.

    Watch this video to find out more:

    You can add Tickets, Actions and Cases to the list, even ones which aren't assigned to you, up to a maximum of 50 items. You can get to your Focus List from anywhere in Work Manager by clicking on the Focus List icon in your header bar.

    Clicking on an item in your list will take you directly to that work item, either in a new browser tab or in the existing view if you're set to open up links that way.

    Adding Work Items to your Focus List

    You can add items to your focus list in a few different ways:

    • Firstly, you can add them from within the Focus List itself by clicking on the plus icon and then searching for either the title or reference number of the work item you're looking for. Select which work item or items you want to add from the search result and click to add.

    • Another way is to click on the 'Add to Focus List' icon from within a Ticket, Action or Case.

    • And you also can also add items to the list from the homepage grid by selecting one or multiple items and then clicking the 'Add to Focus List' option that appears in the grid header.

    Once they're added, work items can easily be arranged in your list, just drag and drop to relocate them.

    If you're accessing a Ticket, Case or Action which is already in your Focus List, you'll be shown that with the ticked Focus list icon. You can click on that link again to remove it from your list, or, alternatively they can easily be removed from with the list itself - select one or more, click the remove link and then confirm.

    One thing to note is that once a work item moves to a state of Resolved or Closed, it will automatically be removed from your focus list, freeing up space for other open items you want to focus on. However, users can still add items in either of these states into the Focus List if they want.

    Additionally, when a user tries to open multiple links in new tab from the Focus List, occasionally they might not be able to and will instead be shown a pop-up stating that multiple tabs have been blocked from being opened. Users simply need to click to allow pop-ups and redirects from Enate.

    Creating a Work Item from an Existing Email

    There are certain circumstances when clients may send in an email that should really be used to start a new work item but, because they've sent it as a response to an existing mail chain, it ends up being attached to an existing work item. A prime example of this is when a client responds to an email with the intention of starting a new ticket but it gets added to the work item of the email chain that they were replying to. In such circumstances, you can use the 'Create a new Work Item from this email' feature which allows incoming emails that get added to an existing work item like this, to now be reprocessed and used to create a new work item.

    When will you be able to create a Work item from an existing email?

    You will have the option to create a Work Item from any email that is attached to an existing Work Item, so long as it is not the initial email that created a Work Item.

    How does this work?

    If you are working on a Work Item and realize that an email that has been attached to it should actually have started a new Work Item, you can use the 'Create a new Work Item' icon that will appear on the email attached to the Work item which you want to use to create new work.

    Clicking this link and then the following confirmation popup will result in the email being effectively sent back into Enate, but with an additional rule that it should not append itself to an existing work item. Once the email has successfully created a new work item, a confirmation message will appear.

    Once the new work item has been created, a note will show at the top of that mail with a link to that new work item, and that original mail entry in the first work item will effectively be set to 'read only' (since it should no longer be used to process the request within that mail).

    Links between the original Work Item and the new Work Item will also be displayed on each of their respective 'Linked Items' tabs.

    Managing Contacts

    There a numerous ways of creating and managing contacts in Enate. Watch this video to find out more:

    Adding, Editing and Deleting ContactsContacts PageContact Activity PageContact TagsContacts Card

    SLA & Cycle Time

    SLA & Cycle Time

    The detailed view of on-time performance and how long work takes end to end. This is where you diagnose why the SLA is where it is.

    SLA & Cycle Time tab.

    KPI cards

    • SLA Compliance, Work Items Overdue, Work Items On Target, AHT in Hrs - as defined earlier, shown here in an SLA context.

    • Avg TAT (Days) - average end-to-end turnaround in days, from creation to resolution. Includes all the time an item spent in the system, not just handling time. Lower is faster.

    Visuals

    • SLA Compliance Trend - on-time percentage by month, so you can see whether performance is improving or slipping. Drill into any month for its weekly and daily detail.

    • SLA Status - met vs not-met donut for the period.

    • Ageing Distribution - Open Work Items - the same age bucketing as the Volume tab but filtered to open items only, highlighting SLA risk from items sitting in the queue.

    Viewing Recently Accessed Work Items

    If you wish to quickly re-access a work item (e.g. you wish to re-open a work item tab you’ve just closed down), open the ‘Recently Accessed’ link from the navigation dropdown.

    This will display a list of the last 20 items which you have accessed (along with datetime the tab was closed), ordered by most recent first. Click an item to re-open the tab.

    Working Between Teams

    Sometimes when you're sending an email on a Work Item and you need to involve teams in other parts of your business, you may not know if they're using Enate yet to manage their work - particularly in larger organisations - and so it can be unclear precisely how to proceed.

    Now, when you're working in Enate, you no longer have to worry about this - the system will take care of this for you. You can just write your mail and the system will know what to do next; if anyone internal is involved and they're using Enate, we'll prompt you with tickets or cases of theirs that you might want to share this email with, or quickly create a new work item if needed.

    Doing so helps keep all subsequent communications tightly synched up between those teams and any external parties. If you're sending the email to someone who is not using Enate, the system will just send them the email.

    If we take an example where we have:

    How to Read a Report in Enate

    Hovering over any bar, line, slice or KPI shows a tooltip: a small pop-up box that appears next to the cursor and explains exactly what you're looking at. It gives the precise figure behind the point you're hovering on plus its supporting detail.

    Every chart and visual in this report supports drill-through. Right-click (or use the drill controls in the visual header) to move between month, week and day on time-based charts, to drill into a category, or to open "See Records" / the underlying data as a table and export it to Excel.

    You can easily navigate back up from tables showing the underlying data:

    Hovering over a visual will usually bring up a 'Drill down' option in the tooltip.

    Click to drill in to view the next level visual for this data. Data in the other cards will filtering their display accordingly. Hover again for tooltip and click the 'Drill up' option to return to the original visual display level.

    Unhandled Emails Further Specifics

    Emails will appear in the Unhandled Emails view of your 'Email Inbox' view in Work Manager if they meet one of the following conditions:

    1. None of the To and/or CC email addresses have a matching email route.

    2. There are only BCC email addresses in an email, no To or CC addresses.

    See the table below for further detailed information on how emails arriving into Enate are treated, depending on the combinations of Enate-relevant email addresses may appear in the TO, CC or BCC fields.

    User Availability Insights

    The optional 'Insights' feature lets you capture key information regarding the availability of users. This can help Team leads and Operations Managers to better schedule work by giving them a view of where time is being spent day-to-day.

    If Insights is switched on in your system (see ), when users log into Work Manager for the first time each day, they'll be met with a popup after a short while, asking them to confirm:

    • Their working hours for the day, e.g. 8 hrs (this may default in a value from their working calendar if one is set for them, or from the previous day's entered value.

    • a rundown of any non-core activities they may have planned for the day, for example a training session, or 1-2-1 meetings, plus their expected working hours for the day.

    Contact Activity Page

    The Contact Activity Page displays the activity details for an individual service recipient.

    You can navigate to the Contact Activity page via:

    1. Quickfind – clicking on a user in

    2. A Work Item – clicking on a contact in the of a work item

    3. The Contact Management Page – clicking on the first name of a contact in the

    Once you are on the Contact Activity Page, you can see the contact's details on the right-hand side and update them as needed.

    Creating New Work

    Work can be created by users from within Work Manager in two ways:

    1. From Create New Work Item. This is a dropdown available from the toolbar, the user selects a Case or Ticket to start under a specific business context

    2. From the Contact Activity page, often also referred to as the Call Handling Page. From this page, the user would first search for and find a person (often someone calling in to the service centre), and then start a piece of work directly for them, i.e. a Ticket or a Case

    You can create work by clicking on the ‘Create’ link in the header bar (cube image). This will produce a dropdown screen section allowing you to start a new work item. The hierarchy displayed in the dropdown goes Company, Contract, Service, Process Group (if Configured) followed by the Cases that can be created.

    Volume & Workload

    A deeper look at what's coming in, what's going out and where the backlog is building. Use this tab for capacity and workload planning.

    Volume & Workload tab.

    • Work Items Started, Work Items Open, Work Items Overdue, Work Items Closed - as defined on the Operations Summary tab.

    • Work Items On Target - open items still within their due date, i.e. the team still has time to resolve them before an SLA breach.

    Help when trying to mail another team's (closed) Work Item

    In Enate, if you find yourself trying to reply to a closed Work Item in Enate, the system will provide you will alternatives as Enate does not allow mails to be sent to closed Work Items.

    The system helps you out by auto-detecting that the Work Item you'd normally be sending the mail through to is now closed. You'll be presented with a pop-up giving alternative work items that the mail can be sent through to. For each alternative option you'll see:

    • The closed Work Item reference number,

    • The active linked parent Work item reference number

    Email Inbox View

    This shows emails related to in-progress Work Items in your business areas. There are various filtering options and ways to view different sets of data. Use this view to keep on top of incoming emails for the work items you and your team are dealing with.

    By default, emails received within the past 90 DAYS are displayed. Users can use the Filter dropdown to select a different (e.g. older) date or date range to see emails older than this, but note that the date range specified can only span a maximum of 90 days.

    In the collapsible folder pane on left-hand side of the Email Inbox, you can see links to various sections of your Email Inbox, divided into:

    • My Emails - Emails for all work items that are currently in your Work Inbox (that you'd see in your Homepage)

    Custom Cards

    Custom Data can be added to Tickets, Cases and Actions to capture bespoke information on these work items as they run through process. The information is displayable via Custom Cards. Custom Cards can be set to display in the main section of the work item, and also as a section of the side panel on the right side of the screens.

    Custom Cards can be designed (with HTML, Typescript and CSS) to surface almost any content, e.g. content from other systems.

    Custom Cards can be linked up to standard system validation in order to e.g. make filling in of certain data on a card a requirement before you can progress a work item.

    If you have a work item open and are modifying custom data, Enate will check for any data conflict when you go to update the work item. Specifically, a check will be made to see if another user has accessed the work item and changed any of its custom data since you opened it. If so, a confirmation message box will be displayed to you asking whether you wish to proceed with your update (which will override their changes) or instead cancel and refresh your screen to see (and keep) those latest changes.

    Quality & Defects

    Where quality problems surface - defects, rework, reopens and peer-review failures - and who or what is causing them.

    Quality & Defects tab.

    • Defects Count - total defects logged against the team's work in the period.

    • Work Items Reopened - cases or actions sent back after being resolved, because the resolution wasn't accepted.

    table of the ten agents who resolved the most items, with their AHT and SLA %.
  • Communication & Quality overview cards - headline email and quality figures lifted from the Communications and Quality & Defects tabs.

  • Avg TAT (Days) By Queue -
    average turnaround per queue. High-TAT queues may need process changes, more staff or reprioritisation.

    Daily Volume Trend - day-by-day received vs closed. Diverging lines (received rising, closed flat) mean the backlog is building.

  • Status Breakdown By Customer - 100% stacked bar; each customer's work split by status. Good for comparing workload health across customers at a glance.

  • Queue Wise Count - volume of work items per queue, highest first.

  • Ageing Distribution - open items grouped into age buckets (0–2, 3–5, 6–10, 11–15, 16–20, 21+ days). Large bars in the older buckets flag a backlog problem.

    • On the trend charts (Daily Volume Trend and Monthly Volume – Received vs Closed), Work Items Closed is counted by close date - the day the item was actually completed - so each period shows the work finished then, regardless of when it arrived.

    • The Work Items Closed KPI card on the Volume & Workload page works differently: it is based on the start date. It counts items that were started within the selected period and have since reached a closed status. So the card answers "of the work that came in this period, how much is now done," while the trend charts answer "how much work was completed in this period.

    Volume & Workload

    KPI cards

    Visuals

    How Work Items Closed is counted

    Work Items Reworked - items flagged for rework at least once before being resolved.

  • Peer Review Failure Count - number of times a reviewer found a problem. One item can fail more than once, so this can exceed the number of items reviewed.

    • Defects Trend - area chart of defects raised over time; drills month → week → day. A rising trend means quality issues are increasing.

    • Defects By Category - donut breaking the period's defects down by category (e.g. incorrect data entry, missing documentation, process not followed), with the total in the center and each slice's count and share shown around the ring. Use it to see which types of defect dominate so you can target the right fix.

    • Party At Fault - who was responsible for each defect (platform, agent, customer, third party) - shows where to focus improvement effort.

    • Defects By Queue - defect counts per queue, split into resolved and unresolved. A large unresolved portion may point to a systemic problem in that queue.

    Quality & Defects

    KPI cards

    Visuals

    You can use this to help identify resources which are stretched and other team member who you may be able to share work out among to help balance workloads.

    My Team Display Options

    Available / Offline Status for Team Members

    Note: if you do not log out properly, i.e. shut down the browser or machine directly without logging out of Enate, the system will display you as still online for the duration of the standard system timeout (usually 30 minutes).

    Sorting by work item status

    Searching for team members

    Viewing an Individual User

    Unassigned Work

    For Tickets you can choose from four resolution methods: ‘No Customer Response’, which is the default, ‘Rejected’, ‘Rejected as Spam’, and ‘With Customer Response’.

    For Actions, there's only one method to choose: ‘Complete’.

    You can add a single comment to apply to all your selected Tickets if you choose ‘With Customer Response’, you MUST add a comment before you can resolve them. Adding comments is NOT available when bulk resolving ACTIONS however.

    You can bulk resolve Tickets and Actions from any of the views in your Homepage grid: Work Inbox, your Team Work Inbox, Owned Work, and your Team Owned Work.

    Note that there are Two types of Tickets which CAN’T be bulk resolved: Tickets that are parents of Split Tickets, and Tickets that have been converted into a Case. These can only be resolved by completing their child work items. If you select one, you'll see a warning, and it'll be skipped when the rest are resolved.

    What are the Resolution Methods?

    Can I bulk resolve Tickets and Actions that other users can see?

    Can I add a comment when bulk resolving Tickets and Action?

    What Tickets can’t I bulk resolve?

    Jane, a User working out of Team A in the UK
  • Karina, a user in Team B in Poland

  • An external party who has mailed in a query initially relating to the UK, which lands with Team A

  • Jane in Team A is writing a response email to the external requestor also see that part of the query needs to involve their Polish team, Team B. Jane doesn't need to know if the Polish team are using Enate, she just adds their email address to her outgoing email.

    Enate knows that the Polish team's email address is connected to an Enate mailbox and so it's going to result in Ticket or Case for them. Upon clicking to send the email, Enate will bring up a pop-up explaining this to the User, and asking for some more information which will help in the creation of of the work item for the other team.

    Once the user adds this further information to create a linked work item she can confirm to proceed. The email gets sent out to any external recipients, and the other team, Team B in Poland, see the email within a relevant, LINKED, Ticket or Case. Both Teams are aware of the other team's Linked ticket or Case and can keep themselves in the loop on progress.

    If Team B's activities happen to fall outside of Team A's permissions, they're still able to see at least the header-level information for it on the Linked Items screen.

    Importantly, all the downstream communications get kept tightly in synch.

    The External recipient can see both team's addresses on their email and, if they send back a response, BOTH teams will be updated at the same time. Everyone is kept in the loop.

    In the most regular scenario, the pop-up would likely show the single, already linked ticket or Case which Team B are working on, essentially saying 'do you want to share this mail with Team B's running ticket?'.

    If there's any other internal email addresses added to a mail, going to areas of your business that aren't yet using Enate that's fine - they'll simply go out as emails to communicate with that other team as they normally would.

    For more information on Plus Addressing and how to enable it, see this article:

    Communications between Internal Teams - Overview

    Example Scenarios

    Teams working between Permissions boundaries

    Downstream Emails kept in Synch

    What about other Teams not yet using Enate?

    Requirement: 'Plus Addressing' Enabled on Your Company Mail Server

    IMPORTANT NOTE: in order to make use of these features, your email admin team MUST have enabled the 'Plus Addressing' setting in your email server setup - this is what helps route all mails through to the right work items downstream.

    Main Filter - use the filter bar at the top left of the report to focus the report by customer, contact, process (Case/Ticket/Action), queue or work state.

    To clear everything, open the main filter display and use Clear Filters.

    Click Segment to Filter

    Clicking on a segment within a card will filter down data in all of the other cards. The selected segment will highlight.

    De-select the segment to unfilter your data.

    All report dates use the UTC time zone.

    Closed work items are shown for the past year; open/running items show their full history even if that's longer than a year.

    Most KPI cards show a small trend badge - an up arrow (▲) or a down arrow (▼) - comparing the current period to the one immediately before it. The comparison window always matches the length of your selected date range: filter to the last 30 days and the badge compares against the previous 30 days.

    An up arrow means the metric has gone up versus the prior period and a down arrow means it has gone down. Whether that's good or bad depends on the metric. For SLA Compliance, % Utilisation or Work Items Closed, up is good. For Work Items Overdue, Defects, Reopens or Avg TAT, down is the improvement. Work Items On Target follows the same rule - more on-target work is better, so up is good.

    The badge is colour-coded by whether the movement is good or bad, not by its direction: green when the metric moved in a desired direction (whether that's up or down for that metric), red when it moved in the undesirable direction, and grey when there's no change or no comparable prior period (shown as "— No Change" or "--"). So a green ▼ on Overdue and a green ▲ on SLA both mean "good".

    Tooltips on every visual

    Drill-through on every visual

    Drill down and Drill Up

    Filters

    Dates are UTC

    Important Note: Report data isn't real-time; it refreshes on a schedule and the last-updated time stamp is shown on the report.

    Closed vs Open history

    Understanding the KPI trend indicators ▲▼

    Scenario

    Number of work Items Created

    Will they appear in the Unhandled View

    Email to just one email address in either the TO or CC field

    1

    No

    Email to 2 or more email addresses in either TO or CC field

    When do emails appear in the Unhandled Emails view?

    optionally, they can note down how they're currently feeling too.

    The purpose of this popup is to allow users to note down the time when they will be busy on activities such as meetings or 1-to-1 feedback sessions.

    This data can then be assessed by Team Leader and Operations Managers to help form a clearer picture of how much time is available for actively working on Cases, Ticket and & Actions versus other indirect activities such as attending Meetings or Training courses or similar. As part of this, obviously the overall number of working hours available for a given day for that user needs to be captured, as well as things like expected break totals.

    Over time, Team Leaders will be able to form a picture of the overall amount of time available for these different activities, and spot trends to help them predict capacity going forward. There's also the ability for some short term forward planning if we have visibility of users expected time available over the next few days.

    The Insights feature can be enabled / disabled by Admin This feature can be enabled from the General Settings section of Builder.

    The Insights Feature has the following main sections:

    In the Main Insights Page, and the Insights Report, you will only see your own availability insight data. If you have people that report to you in Enate, you'll also be able to see the data from your team members, depending on the level of feature access you have set in your user role, specifically:

    • Users with the 'Set up Team & Queues' feature access option - set in the User Roles section of Builder - will be able to see the information entered by themselves and their team (i.e. the people who they manage).

    • Users without the 'Set up Team & Queues' feature access option will only be able to see their own data.

    Overview - what is the Insights feature?

    How does it work?

    Enabling Insights

    Enabling Insights

    The different section of Insights

    Whose Data can I see?

    The Insights Popup
    Main Insights Page
    Main Insights Page: Team Leader Features
    The User Insights Report

    Clicking on the 'Work Items' tab lets you see all work items which relate to the contact. Each work item is shown as a card with data about it like reference, title of work item, due date, assignee, queue, and state. Work Items can be opened for further details by clicking on reference and title. Running items are displayed by default, completed work items can also be displayed.

    Clicking on the 'Comms' tab lets you see communications (emails, notes) relating to the user and the work items relating to them. You can search for specific communications here too.

    You can also start a new piece of work for the contact from the Contact Activity Page. Starting a new work item from the Contact Activity Page will automatically assign the contact as the Primary Contact, Requester and Subject on the work item, and if they have a Default Tag set, they will be tagged as this as well on the work item. Note that when launching a Ticket, the 'Send Automated Emails' option is automatically set to off.

    You are able to copy the user's name by clicking on the copy button on the tab:

    Quickfind
    contacts card
    Contact Management Page

    The work items that you can start from here depends upon if the work items have been , which when it was created in Work Manager, and which as well.

    Input links automatically appear here for Tickets and Cases when you have created a Ticket or Case process in Builder and set it to Live. Clicking on a link will create the new work item in a separate tab.

    You can create work by clicking on the 'Start New Activity' dropdown on the Contact Activity page.

    If you are on a contact page for someone under a known company (i.e. scoped at customer level), the Customer information will not display in this link name. A free text search will allow you to filter this list of links. Administrators can control whether you wish to see the Input link for a given Ticket / Case process via settings in Builder

    Creating a work item from the contact activity page will automatically assign the contact as the primary contact of the work item.

    Creating New Work Item from the ‘Create New Work Item’ dropdown

    Note: When running in Test Mode, processes which are in a state of ‘validated draft’ will be displayed here

    Creating New Work Item from the Contact Activity page

    And the option for you to replace the closed Work Item with the active parent as the email recipient, or to just remove the closed Work item from being a recipient. Choosing the 'Remove' option will allow you to manually input an alternative recipient.

    Once an email has been sent to the active parent Work Item, the parent Work Item will have the 'new information flag' set to on and users subscribed to the relevant notifications will be notified that an email has arrived for the parent Work Item.

    If the linked parent Work Item has also been closed, you will be presented with a different pop-up showing the closed Work Items, that there are no active parent Work Items and allowing you remove closed Work Item from being the recipient.

    What if the parent Work Item is Closed?

    My Team Emails - Emails for all work items that are currently in the Work Inbox of your Team. This link is visible if you are a Team Leader or are able to see your peers and Queues.

  • Unassigned Emails - Emails for all unassigned work items sitting in Queues you work out of. This link is visible if you are a Team Leader or are able to see your peers and Queues.

  • All emails - in this section you will be able to view all emails belonging to work items, including closed items, in your business areas that you have permissions on. In this section you can also filter by the status of the work item that the email belongs to.

  • The numbers displayed show the number of unread emails in these different folders.

    • Unhanded Emails - here you'll be able to see any such unhandled emails for your area of the business, and decide on the what to do with them. The number next to this section shows you the total number of emails in the section. See here for more information.

    There's also links to your Sent Items and your Outbox - all of which open in separate tabs.

    You can see a list of all the emails in your inbox as well as Self Service user comments, with the most recent at the top, showing who the email is from, when it was received, the subject of the email, a preview of the first line of the email body and which work item the email relates to. You will also be able to see if the email has any attachments and if the email was sent with high importance.

    Unread emails will appear in bold and you can filter to view just your unread emails by clicking on the 'Unread' option.

    You can filter your inbox by Customer, Contract, Service, Process, Queue, the 'from' email address, whether or not the email has attachments, and by email received date.

    If you have access to the 'My Team Emails' view you'll also be able to filter by assigned user.

    For the 'All Emails' section you can also filter by the status of the work item that the email belongs to.

    You can switch between viewing 'My Emails' which are the emails in your own inbox, 'My Team Emails' which will show you the emails in the inbox of your team members, 'Unassigned Emails' which will show you incoming emails for work items in your Queues which don't have an assignee, 'All emails' which shows you all emails related to work items, including closed items, in your business areas that you have permissions on and 'Unhandled Emails' which shows you any unprocessed emails for your area of the business so that you can decide what to do with them.

    For My Emails, My Team Emails, Unassigned Emails and All Emails, when a new email comes in the 'unread' number will refresh and a mail icon will appear on the refresh button. You just need to click it to refresh your inbox and view the newly arrived emails.

    For Unhandled Emails, the number next to this section shows you the total number of emails in the section. See here for more information.

    The main section of the Email Inbox view displays the preview panel for whichever email you have selected. You can adjust the size of the email preview panel to suit your needs.

    When you click on a email, you will be able to see the full email in the right-hand side of the screen. You can see the subject of the email, who it was sent from, who it was sent to, any CC recipients, a link to the work item that the email relates to, the due date of the work item and the full content of the email.

    If you click on reply, reply all, or forward for an email, the system will open a new tab displaying the Work item in question and will take you to the email editor screen to start composing your email.

    Further options are also available from the ellipses next to the reply links. These will allow you to go directly to the work item that the email relates to (opening in a new tab), and to print the email directly.

    You also have the option to download the underlying .eml file.

    If an email has any attachments, you can see the name of the attachment, its size and the option to download it. If the email has multiple attachments, you have the additional options of downloading all of the attachments or downloading them all as a ZIP file.

    You can also expand the email to full-screen mode, where the preview pane is hidden.

    Overview

    Sections in Email Inbox

    Note that an email will be marked as read when a user opens an email.

    Filtering Options

    Switching between views and refreshing on new incoming mails

    You can mark individual emails as read/unread, but please note that this will NOT affect the new information flag on the work item that the email relates to, so marking an email as read will NOT switch off the new information icon in the work item.

    Replying / forwarding emails

    Further options

    Please note: If the email you are attempting to download contains an attachment file which has been explicitly manually deleted by a user (for e.g. reasons of data sensitivity), the .eml download option will be disabled for that email - the system will display a message explaining the reason for this disabling when download icon is clicked.

    Email Attachments

    Full-screen option

    Please note that the Case owner will NOT be notified in these situations.

    Automatic Retries

    Please note that when you do a manual retry, this will be counted as an attempted retry and will therefore be included in the number showing how many times the system has 'automatically' retried establishing a connection.

    In this circumstance of the Action failing to establish connection with the external system, this will escalate to the Case Owner, highlighting in the Action section of the Case screen that this Action was Closed - Not Done Successfully.

    Adjusting the retry settings in Builder during / after retries have begun

    configured in Builder
    here

    Manually adding contacts to the contacts card

    Note that you will only be able to view contacts from the same company as the work item.

    tagged

    Exceptions - handled by User in Work Manager

    Approval Request Declined

    **Note: Approval request email sending will start again from the beginning, i.e. all requesters will be mailed again. If they click on any previously sent emails, they will be met with a message telling them that THAT specific approval request is no longer valid, as the details of what is being requested may have changed).

    Insufficient Approvers

    Note: While an Approval Action is state of 'To Do', or 'In Progress', external parties who were mailed out approval requests will NOT be able to approve or decline. Instead the will be met with a message informing them that the item in question is currently being processed. Work Manager Users MUST move the Action back to a state of 'Wait for more information' if they wish the approval activity to recommence.

    If Approval Requests Time out..

    Removal of Work Items from Focus List

    Allowing Opening of Work Items from Focus List

    It should be noted that this option will never appear on the initial email which creates a work item, only on subsequent incoming emails which could be inappropriately appending.

    Filling in Data Fields on Tickets, Cases and Actions

    Validation in Custom Cards

    Custom Data Override Warning

    'Sub Cases' tab

    Contact Tags

    Contact tags are used to link contacts to work items.

    System-Default Tags

    The system-default Contacts Tags that are available are:

    • Primary Contact – the main person you are dealing with for this query. There can only ever be one Primary Contact for a work item. This is mandatory for a Ticket. Depending on Case configuration in Builder, this may or may not be mandatory for a Case (if set as mandatory for Case type, is also mandatory for that Case’s Actions).

    • Original Requester - the person who initially raised the request. There can only ever be one Original Requester for a work item, and it is independent to the 'Requester' tag. The original requester will be either automatically set in the situation where a valid contact sent in the email that started the work item, or the first person who gets manually set as the ‘requester’ will be promoted to ‘original requester’. The Original Requester tag cannot be changed once it has been set and you cannot remove the contact tagged as the original requester from the work item.

    • Requester – the person requesting the query. There can only ever be one Requester for a work item. This is mandatory for a Ticket. Depending on Case configuration in Builder, this may or may not be mandatory for a Case (if set as mandatory for Case type, is also mandatory for that Case’s Actions).

    • Subject – who the work item is about (this may be neither of the above). There can only ever be one Subject for a work item.

    Very often all three will be the same person. If you tag another contact as any of these system-default relationship types, the tag will be removed from the previous contact - as there can be only one holder of the system-default contacts in one work item.

    When you manually add the first contact to a work item they will be set as the Primary Contact, Requester and Subject by default. You can manually reassign these tags to other users afterwards.

    • CCs – any further contacts which can be copied on any correspondence. When a contact is tagged only as ‘CC’, it will be displayed in the separate CCs section (hidden until any CC-only contacts exist on the work item.

    In addition to the system-default Contact Tags (Primary Contact, Subject, CC, Requester), you can add a further default contact tag to a contact record to make using contact tags on work items faster and easier.

    Example: If you know that 'Jane Smith' is always going to be the Broker or any work item you add them to as a contact, you can give Jane's Contact record a default tag of 'Broker' so it gets auto-populated for her in the work item - rather than you having to manually set this tag value each time.

    The Default Tags list available to choose from is set in Builder in the section.

    You can set this Default Tag whenever you add a new contact into the system.

    You can also add the tag to existing contacts and edit the Default Tag set to a contact via the Contacts page.

    The Default Tag attribute is also available to edit in bulk, i.e. you can set this for multiple contacts at one time - simply select a number of contact records from the Contacts page grid and click on the Edit button to access the Bulk Edit popup.

    If a specific tag value has not been set to 'Allow Multiple', only one contact in a Work Item is allowed to have the value. Example: it may be that there can be only a single 'Broker' contact for Ticket. This obviously impacts default tagging if two contacts with the same 'must be unique' Default Tag get added to a work item, either manually or automatically. In this scenario the system will allocate the Default Tag to only one contact (and therefore remove the Default Tag for the other contacts). The system will allocate to the Contact already tagged with an existing other tag value, in the following priority order.

    • Primary Contact

    • Requester

    • Subject

    • CC

    • You will not be able to add a Default Tag to a contact if the company they are assigned to has a different Supplier Company to the Default Tag.

    • You will not be able to submit a work item with a contact whose Default Tag is set to a different Supplier Company than the work item.

    When an email arrives from an address which is associated with a contact that is already in the system and the contact:

    • has a Global scope setting, or

    • they have a Local scope setting but belong to the same company that the work item will belong to based on email routing rules

    then their details are automatically populated into the Contacts Card when the work item is created by the system and they will automatically be tagged as the Primary Contact, Original Requester and Requester of the work item. Additionally, if they have a default tag assigned to them, they will also be tagged as that. However do note that you can always go in and manually edit the tags yourself once the work item has been created.

    When an email arrives from an address which is associated with a contact that is already in the system, but they have a Local scope setting and belong to a different company than the one the work item will belong to based on email routing rules, their details will NOT be automatically populated into the Contacts Card when the work item is created by the system, (and therefore they cannot be automatically tagged to the work item). Note that you can always go in and manually edit the contact and tags yourself once the work item has been created.

    Default 'Global' or 'Global & Local' Scope

    When an email arrives from an unknown address and:

    • the and

    • your system has been configured to set the scope of your external contacts to 'Global', or 'Global and Local',

    then the contact will be auto-created, have a Global scope (i.e. the won't be linked to any specific company) and their details will be automatically populated into the Contacts Card when the work item is created by the system. Additionally, they will automatically be tagged as the Primary Contact, Original Requester and Requester of the work item. As they were previously unknown to the system, they will have no default tag set. Note that you can always go in and manually edit the tags yourself once the work item has been created.

    Default 'Local' Scope

    When an email arrives from an unknown address and

    • the and

    • your system has been configured to set the scope of your external contacts to 'Local',

    then the contact will be auto-created, have a Local scope (i.e. they will be linked to a specific company) and they will be created under the company that the work item exists under. Their details will be automatically populated into the Contacts Card when the work item is created by the system and they will automatically be tagged as the Primary Contact, Original Requester and Requester of the work item. As they were previously unknown to the system, they will have no default tag set. Note that you can always go in and manually edit the tags yourself once the work item has been created.

    Automatic Contact Creation OFF

    When an email arrives from an unknown address and

    • the ,

    then the work item will be created based on the email routing rules, but the email sender's details will NOT be automatically populated into the Contacts Card when the work item is created by the system, (and therefore they cannot be automatically tagged to the work item). Note that you can always go in and manually edit the contacts and tags yourself once the work item has been created.

    When a work item is created from the 'Start work item' button on the of a contact, that contact will be auto-tagged as the Original Requester, Requester, Subject and Primary Contact of the work item, and their Default Tag will be added too (if they have one).

    Email Attachments

    Attaching files to an email

    Files can be attached to an email in various ways.

    1) You can attach files when composing an email by clicking on the attach files option at the foot of the email section.

    Files that are already attached to the work item, and are therefore already in the files tab (including files attached to previous existing emails within the work item) will be available for selection from here. You can use the search function to search for specific files if there are many to choose from.

    You can also search for files from your PC to attach from here by clicking on the ‘Browse This PC’ icon.

    2) You can add links to an email by clicking on the attach links option at the foot of the email section. Links that have already been added to the work item (and are therefore already in the files tab).

    3) You can drag and drop files from your desktop into the email section

    4) Files which have been linked to a standard Canned Text will automatically attach to the email when the canned text is selected.

    When emails are auto-generated and sent by the system, the email template used may be linked to one or more tags – the system will identify any files currently attached to the work item which have been tagged with this same value, and will auto-attach them to the email before sending.

    You can view all the email attachments that have been added to the work item and other related/linked work items in the files tab.

    Attachments from incoming emails are denoted with a green email icon:

    Attachments from outgoing emails are denoted with a blue email icon:

    You can see the name of the file, what type of file it is, its size and when and by who it was uploaded and the reference number of the work item it was uploaded to.

    You can also see the and that have been added to the files.

    You can download files from an email by opening the email you have received and clicking to download the file attached.

    If multiple files have been attached, you have the option to download all the files individually or to download them as a zip file.

    It is possible to download multiple attachments with a single click from mails in the comms and timeline section. Clicking on the ‘Download all’ icon will download all attachments present in that Comms / Timeline section item.

    You can download individual files by clicking on the the option in the menu on the right.

    You can download multiple files at once by selecting the files you wish to download and selecting the option at the top of the screen.

    You can download multiple files in a zip file by selecting the files you wish to download and selecting the option at the top of the screen.

    If your system has been set up to let you delete email attachments, you can delete attachments that originated from an email in the file card of a work item. This is useful when, for example, you are dealing with sensitive information in email attachments.

    The deleted attachment will also be deleted from other related work items such as other Actions in a Case, Sub Cases, child and parent Tickets if a Ticket has been merged, child Cases and parent Tickets if a Ticket has been converted to a Case.

    But note that if you delete an email attachment from a Ticket that has been split or is the child Ticket of a split, the deleted file will not be deleted from the other child Ticket(s) or the parent Ticket.

    Note also that deleting an attachment from a linked work item will NOT delete the attachment from the work item(s) it is linked with.

    Please also be aware that it is not possible to delete an email attachment from a work item that is Closed.

    The attachment will be deleted from all parts of the system, so you won't be able to search for it in Quickfind, and it will not be available to attach to a new email relating to the work item.

    Any further activity on the work item will not resurrect the deleted attachment and creating a new linked work item will not resurrect the deleted attachment.

    You will be notified in the timeline when an email attachment has been deleted, along with the file name of the email attachment that was deleted, the subject of the email it was attached to, who deleted it and when it was deleted.

    Creating New Email Routes from Unhandled Emails

    As part of dealing with Unhandled emails, users can create email routing directly within Work Manager. Creating these rules helps stop equivalent future emails from landing as Unhandled emails, ensuring that a Ticket or Case gets created for them. This reduces future Unhandled email volumes and makes sure work can start on these items more quickly. To provide an element of control, the ability of Work Manager users to create new email routes is an option which can be turned off/on in via User Roles in Builder.

    Once these rules are created in Work Manager they're instantly live and working, however Admin users in Builder are notified of any new routing rules created in this way, and these remain marked for their attention until the Admin acknowledges them. Admins still have the ability to adjust or even turn off such rules after assessing them.

    Granting Access to Work Manager users to create new Email Routes

    Feature Access to be able to create new Email Routes in Work Manager is controlled via Enate's User Role system, with a new option being added to the Email View Options section.

    Note: This 'Create Email Routes' access will be set to ON for the Standard Team Member role

    How to create a new Email Route in Unhandled Emails

    While dealing with an unhandled email in the Unhandled emails section of the Email Inbox page, if you choose to have the email processed into a Ticket / Case (by clicking 'New Work Item' option), you'll be met with the following popup:

    You can search by email route (which will auto-populate the Customer/Contract/Service/Process fields based on suggestions for the mailbox address selected), or can manually select. Clicking Create at this point will create the specific Ticket or Case from the email, as normal.

    However, if you also wish to have the same thing happen automatically ongoing, you can click on the 'Apply to other emails' link at the foot of the popup before you hit 'Create'. If you've selected this option, when you hit 'Create' two things will happen:

    • A small confirmation message shows confirming that a new work item has been created.

    • A further popup screen to 'Create New Email Routing Rule' is then shown where you can fill in the remaining routing rule details before confirming its creation.

    You can decide if the route is going to be a 'To' or 'From' type of route, i.e.

    • 'treat all emails FROM this address in the same way', OR

    • 'Treat all email TO this address in the same way'

    and then which email address is to be used in conjunction with this. Enate will automatically fill the email address with the relevant email address associated with the unprocessed email you were working on.

    In addition to setting a rule which will deal with all future emails that match this pattern, you can also choose to have the rule run against all/some of the existing Unhandled emails which match this rule. If you wish this to happen, select the 'Auto-apply' toggle and this foot of this popup.

    The system will show you how many of the current backlog of Unhandled emails match this rule, i.e. how many would be reprocessed.

    Selecting this option will bring up a time filter allowing you to select a subset of these existing emails to run the rule for (if, for example, you only want to run this for emails up to a week/month old etc.

    You can use the slider to set different date ranges, including setting specific dates. As you change this setting, the system will update to reflect how many emails this would run the rule for.

    When you're happy with your selection, you can hit Create - the rule will be re-run and emails will start to be re-processed into the type of Case or Ticket you specified.

    If any new email routes have been created in Unhandled Emails in Work Manager, Admin users will be made aware of this in Builder by a red dot on the Email icon section.

    Throughout any subsequent navigation sections and screens as they drill down to the Email Routes page, there will be continued signposting down the new Routing rules that they should be aware of.

    Once on the Routes page, users will see a banner notifying them of new email routes to be aware of, as well as how many there are. A link will allow them to filter the routes down to just those new ones that they need to be aware of.

    Within the routes table itself, users will be alerted to these new routes to be aware of.

    Admin users are encouraged to review these new routing rules (and speak to the user who created them*) to make sure they're happy with how they are running in conjunction with the various other rules. They can choose to unset them from live, make any adjustments and even delete them if they feel necessary.

    If they're happy with the rule they should unmark the 'be adjusted, They can use the 'Clear review filter' link in the header to return to the normal view.

    *You can view who created an email routing rule from the 'Show Activity' icon in the top of the rule details popup.

    Clicking on this will show the audit trail of who created and updated this rule.

    Outbox View

    Overview

    The Outbox Page is where you can find emails belonging to yourself or to your team that are scheduled be to sent at a later date, or have failed to send.

    You can access the Outbox Page from the Emails section in the navigation link. The total number of emails in your Outbox will also be shown in the navigation link.

    You can select how many emails will be shown from the option on the right.

    Outbox Grid Views

    The first time a Team Leader logs in, they will land on the 'My Team Emails' view. The first time a Team Member logs in, they will land on the 'My Emails' view. You are able to change your view of the outbox page to show just your outbox emails, your team's, the system's or all outbox emails. This will be saved when you log out and log back in.

    Selecting 'My Emails' lets you see emails sent by you that are in your outbox.

    'My Team Emails' shows you emails sent by your team that are in the outbox, as well as emails relating to work items that your team members are working on that are in the outbox.

    Selecting 'System Emails' lets you see emails that are sent automatically by the system e.g. because a Ticket has been split or merged.

    'All' lets you see emails sent by you, your team, as well as emails from outside of your team for which you have access.

    You are able to manually retry sending an email by clicking on the Retry icon. The email will now be in a state of 'Pending Retry'.

    You can also retry sending an email from the timeline of the work item itself.

    Additionally, the system can automatically retry sending emails if your system has been set with an Automated Failure Retry Pattern (). Once the system has retried sending an email the maximum number of times specified, it will no longer retry sending it automatically, but you can still retry sending the email manually, i.e. by clicking the 'Retry' icon.

    You are also able to cancel sending an email by clicking on the Cancel icon. This will remove the email from the Outbox.

    You are also able to retry or cancel sending emails in bulk.

    Double clicking on an email will open the email's details in a popup in read only form. You can see who the email is from, who it is to, etc. You are also able to retry and cancel sending the email from the popup.

    You can adjust the grid columns by clicking on the settings cog. These will be saved when you log out and log back in. The 'To' and 'Subject' columns are mandatory.

    • Email Connector - the name of the email connector through which your system sends emails. This is configured in Builder, .

    • Importance - the importance setting of the email i.e. high, normal, low.

    • System Generated - if the email was automatically generated by the system (e.g. to notify a user when a Ticket has been split).

    Reworking a Case

    If issues have occurred during the running of a Case you may wish to rework the Case.

    From a Case

    You can do this from the Case by selecting the ‘Rework’ tab. In the resulting panel, you need to choose where you want to restart the Case from. You can choose to rework the Case from a specific Step or from a specific Action. You can also select a schedule if your system has been configured to allow you to do so.

    Note: In order to re-evaluate the Case Conditions, rework must be started from the start of a step. Further specifics on this:

    • You cannot rework from an Action which was started as an ad-hoc Action.

    • Users are still limited to reworking from steps prior to the current one, and so are also limited to choosing Actions from within prior steps.

    Additionally, if the Case you are wanting to rework has any associated running Sub Cases or manually started Actions (Ad-hoc Actions), you can choose to terminate them as part of reworking the Case.

    Once you are happy, click the ‘Rework’ button in the info card to confirm and begin reworking the Case.

    The Case will move to a state of In Progress.

    All running Actions that are part of the Case will close when the Case is set to rework.

    Copies of these Actions will be created in the Case, all in a state of To Do.

    An entry will also be added to the timeline showing who set the Case to rework, when it was set to rework, and the Step number and Action it was set to rework from. This will also appear in related work item timelines i.e. its Actions and any Sub Cases if you have selected the Case Rework History filter from the timeline filters options.

    You can do this from an Action by selecting the ‘Rework’ tab. In the resulting panel, you need to choose where you want to restart the Case from. You can choose to rework the Case from a specific Step or from a specific Action. You can also select a schedule if your system has been configured to allow you to do so.

    Additionally, if the Case you are wanting to rework has any associated running Sub Cases or manually started Actions (Ad-hoc Actions), you can choose to terminate them as part of reworking the Case.

    Once you are happy, click the ‘Rework’ button to confirm and begin reworking the Case.

    All running Actions that are part of the Case, including the Action you are currently in, will close when the Case is set to rework:

    And copies of these Actions will be created in the Case, all in a state of To Do.

    An entry will also be added to the timeline showing who set the Case to rework, when it was set to rework, and the Step number and Action it was set to rework from. This will also appear in related work item timelines i.e. its Actions and any Sub Cases if you have selected the Case Rework History filter from the timeline filters options.

    When an Action is started in a Case which is currently in rework, the Action will auto-assign to the same user who previously performed the same Action (either the user who completed the Action or, if it was not completed previously, then the last user it was assigned to).

    IDP: 'Document Extraction' Actions

    Overview

    The Document Extraction component automatically extracts the relevant data from files attached to incoming emails so that this data can be used in further processing of the work item, saving your users time and effort. This also means that documents such as PDFs can be scanned and used both to start Cases in Enate and to form part of the ongoing process's activities.

    When a Document Extraction Action runs for a Case, documents attached to the Case can be submitted to your desired technology for scanning and the processed output files will be returned and automatically attached to the Case.

    If at any point the technology you're using is not confident enough of the results, based on a confidence threshold that you can set, Enate will instantly transfer the work to a user in Work Manager to look over and verify, giving you that 'human in the loop' support.

    This component can be switched on by your admin in the Marketplace section of Enate Builder.

    Check out this video to find out more:

    How it works at runtime

    When the Case is run in Work Manager, relevant data from files attached to incoming emails for it will be automatically analyzed and extracted.

    If the technology you're using is confident enough about its data extraction results, this Action won't even need to be seen by a human user, it will simply be completed automatically and the Case will move on to the next Action. The completed data extraction Action can still be viewed if you click on it, but it won't need to be handed over to a human user for involvement.

    However, if the extraction technology is less confident in its data extraction results, the Action will be handed over to a human user when you next hit 'pull from Queue' in their home page, to pick up and look over. When a user opens the Action, you'll see that it's been given to them because some further checks are required.

    To view and validate each document, click on the icon to open, and scroll to the 'validation station' screen in the Action, which shows the scanned document image and the resulting extracted table of data values. This lets you see where those lower confidence levels are highlighted, review them and make any necessary corrections manually. This can viewed in-situ, or expanded out to a popup to display full screen.

    On this validation screen the user will be able to see a scanned copy of the file, which can be multiple pages, alongside two tabs showing extracted data.

    • The Extracted Data tab shows the user key value pairs of the extracted data along with the confidence level that EnateAI has given them. The values can be adjusted when necessary and are saved once the user clicks the update button for that value. Doing so will set the confidence value to 100% for that Key.

    • The Tables tab shows any repeating data that has been picked out as a table. You can use the delete button to delete any rows that you do not need.

    Checkboxes are recorded within the validation fields. EnateAI for IDP can record complicated checkbox questions such as those with multiple answers. The number or letter of checkbox will be recorded in the data validation field as well as any text answer that comes with the checkbox. See the example below:

    If the user needs to leave the Validation Station screen at any time they can just click 'Save as Draft' to save their changes for a particular document.

    Once a user is happy with the data all they need to do to submit the updated data is to click the 'Submit' button. EnateAI will finish processing in the background, and will update the Action screen to confirm when it's finished. The background processing allows the user to move on to any other documents which require verification.

    Once 'Submit' has been clicked for the last document needing validation, the Action screen auto-closes. Again, EnateAI is finishing processing in the background and will mark the Action as Resolved after a short time, then moved to Closed.

    Note: Every time you review and update data items, EnateAI will learn and get a little bit better at its data extraction suggestions. If you notice that the technology is regularly getting its suggestions wrong, speak to your admin team about modifying the confidence threshold.

    • Only one document can be viewed at a time.

    • The maximum file size is 15 pages.

    Defects Card and Recording Defects

    Overview

    When you're working on a Ticket, Action or Case, operational issues can occur which have an effect on how you're able to deliver the process. It is important to record these as a way to highlight them for others who may view or work on the item, and to help with longer term efforts to improve process delivery.

    The Defects section on your work item screens in Enate is there to help you record and manage incidents like this when they occur. If defect categories have been configured in the service line for a Ticket in Builder, a Defects Card will show in that Ticket's screen in Work Manager that provides the functionality to record defects for the work item.

    Defects can occur for a wide variety of reasons, for example:

    • A client is late supplying information you've requested

    • A supplier has attached the wrong file

    • Something's gone wrong as part of the service centre's handling of the activity.

    It is very important to record defects, for various reasons:

    • while the work item is still in progress, it gives other users who might be viewing or working on the activity an instant heads-up of issues which have occurred or are still happening which they'll likely need to know about

    • after a work item has been closed, it helps serve as an accurate record of what went on and what went wrong - which might be important if you're reviewing a specific item and need to be able to explicitly show for example when a client took longer responding with critical information.

    • in the longer term it's really useful as part of analysis to spot patterns in where issues are occurring and where improvements can be made - perhaps there's a repeated quality issue with information from an external party, or a given customer if consistently late supplying information at a certain point in process. If defects aren't recorded, it's likely otherwise resolvable issues will still continue to happen.

    Recording a defect is simple - with a Ticket, Action or Case open, simply expand the Defects card and click to add a new record.

    Select the relevant category that the defect falls under.

    Select the area of responsibility from the ‘Party at Fault’ drop-down - e.g. your organisation, a third party supplier, or the client themselves

    Then add a relevant description.

    If your system is set up to do so, you can also add the number of affected records - an example of when this can be useful is if your were running a payroll process for 100 employees and a defect occurs affecting 20 payslips, you can add that extra detail in here, which can be useful for subsequent reporting.

    You can add as many defects as are needed if multiple issues occur.

    Once you have recorded a defect on a particular work item, it is shared with all related cases, tickets and actions in the same manner as contacts are.

    If a defect gets resolved while the work item is still open, you can go to the defect card and mark it as resolved.

    If a defect was applied to a work item by accident or the defect itself was recorded incorrectly, you can chose to delete it as long as the work item is still in progress.

    Once you're happy with all the details for your new Defect record, or with your changes if you're editing an existing one, click 'Submit' to save your changes.

    Merging a Ticket into another Ticket/Case/Action

    Overview

    The 'Merge' functionality in Enate lets you merge existing work items together so that queries which arrived separately - but should in fact be processed together - can be processed as one work item.

    This is useful when, for example, an incoming email relating to an existing request inadvertently creates a new Ticket instead of auto-appending itself to an already existing request. This can sometimes happen if the incoming email isn't a direct reply to a previously sent Enate email or if the reference number of the initial Ticket isn't part of the email.

    Watch this video to find out more about how to use the merge feature or continue reading below.

    How to Merge

    There are two ways you can merge Tickets in Enate:

    • Close THIS Ticket (and merge it into an existing Ticket / Case / Action in the system)

    To merge a Ticket into another work item, click on the 'merge' tab and select the option to close 'This work item'. Then from the accompanying search field select the work item you want to merge the Ticket into from the Search bar. You can search by title, reference number or the name of the customer, contract or service that the work item belongs to.

    Select the Merge button from the Info card to confirm.

    The Ticket tab will close and be marked as 'Closed' with a resolution method of 'Merged'.

    If you click view this ‘closed’ Ticket again, you will see its status, who it was resolved by, when it was resolved and its resolution method (i.e. 'Merged'). Additionally, the Info card will display a link to the work item it was merged into.

    Communications from the now closed Ticket will now display in the timeline of the remaining work item, marked with a green dot to show they are new to this work item and the reference number of the Ticket they originate from. The markers will clear when a user sets the new information icon as read.

    To keep this Ticket open and merge other existing Tickets into it, click on the 'merge' tab and select the option to close ‘Other work Items’. Then select for the desired Ticket(s) to merge the Ticket into from the Search bar. You can search by title, reference number or the name of the customer, contract or service that the work item belongs to.

    Select the Merge button from the Info card to confirm.

    The other Ticket(s) will be set to ‘Closed' with a Resolution method of 'Merged' and a link to the Ticket they were merged into. If you click view the ‘closed’ Ticket(s), you will see its status, who it was resolved by, when it was resolved and its resolution method (i.e. 'Merged'). Additionally, the Info card will display a link to the work item it was merged into.

    Communications from the now closed Ticket will now display in the timeline of the remaining Ticket, marked with a green dot to show they are new to this work item and the reference number of the Ticket they originate from. The markers will clear when a user sets the new information icon as read.

    When merging a Ticket or Tickets into another work item, the Due Date of that remaining work item is the single relevant Due Date for any ongoing work. It is not recalculated as part of the merging, and similarly the due dates of any of the previously running work items (now set to Closed) are not recalculated before their status is set to Closed. Examples:

    • If an overdue ticket is merged into an on-time work item, the Due Date of the remaining work item stays unaffected - it is not classed as now being Overdue.

    • If an on-time ticket is merged into an overdue work item, the Due Date of the remaining work item stays unaffected - it is not classed as now being 'on time'.

    Sent Items View

    Overview

    Sent Items shows you all of the emails from your business area's work items that have been sent out.

    You can see a preview list of all the emails that have been sent out, with the most recent at the top, showing who the email was sent to, when it was sent, the subject of the email, a preview of the first line of the email body and which work item the email relates to. You will also be able to see if the email has any attachments and if the email was sent with high importance.

    You can adjust the size of the email preview panel to suit your needs.

    When you click on an email, you will be able to see the full email in the right-hand side of the screen. You can see the subject of the email, who it was sent from, who it was sent to, any CC recipients, a link to the work item that the email relates to, the due date of the work item and the full content of the email.

    You can also expand the email to full-screen mode, where the preview pane is hidden.

    Switching between views

    You can switch between viewing 'My Emails' which are the emails that you have sent and 'My Team Emails' which will show you the emails that members of your team have sent.

    You can also reply, reply all, or forward a sent email. When you click on one of these options, the system will open a new tab displaying the work item in question and will take you to the email editor screen to start composing your email.

    You can filter your sent emails by Customer, Contract, Service, Process, Queue, who the email was sent to, date range, the status of the work item that the email relates to, whether or not the email has attachments, and whether or not the email was system-generated.

    Note that when filtering by date you can only filter for a maximum timespan of 90 days.

    If you have access to the 'My Team Emails' view you'll also be able to filter by assigned user and by who the email was sent by.

    Further options are also available from the ellipses next to the reply links. These will allow you to go directly to the work item that the email relates to (opening in a new tab), and to print the email directly.

    You also have the option to download the underlying .eml file.

    If an email has any , you can see the name of the attachment, its size and the option to download it. If the email has multiple attachments, you have the additional options of downloading all of the attachments or downloading them all as a ZIP file.

    Linking Existing Work Items

    Overview

    In addition to having the ability to create new linked work items from a Case or Ticket, you can also create links between existing Cases and Tickets to allow you to better manage activities being carried out by different teams.

    You can create links between existing work items in two ways:

    1. From the home page

    2. From a work item

    Note that you can only create links between Cases and Tickets and you cannot copy communications, files, defects, links or custom data when creating a link between existing work items.

    Linking Work Items from the Home Page

    You can link existing work items from your Home page by selecting the Cases and Tickets from the Home Page grid (which could be displaying your Work Inbox, Team's Work Inbox, Owned Work or Team's Owned Work) that you want to link together and selecting the 'Link' option that appears at the top of the grid.

    The first Case or Ticket that you select will be the work item that all of the subsequent selected work items will be linked to (or the first in your list if you've used the 'Select All' option).

    The resulting pop-up will confirm to you the Case / Ticket the items will be linked to, and the specific items themselves, before allowing you to complete the linking confirmation:

    You can link up to a maximum of 50 work items at one time, but there is no upper limit on the number of work items that can ever be linked.

    If you subsequently go to this main Ticket / Case that everything has been linked to, on its you'll see ALL of the items you chose to link to it.

    However if you're in one of the works items you chose to link to this main Ticket / Case, on that Linked Work tab you'll only see a record of that main Ticket / Case (and not all of the other ones which were linked).

    You can link existing work items from within a work item itself by going to the work item's screen and selecting the '+ Work item' option and then choosing to add an 'Existing item'.

    In the resulting pop-up you can search for the Cases and/or Tickets you want to link this work item to.

    You link up to a maximum of 50 work items at one time, but there is no limit on the number of work items that can ever be linked.

    A link to the new linked Case or Ticket will appear in the in screen of the work items that have been linked.

    You can unlink work items at any time by going to the Linked Work tab in the work item's screen and selecting the Unlink icon.

    Using Multiple Tabs

    Enate's browser-based Work Manager uses a multi-browser page approach. You can control how you want the system to behave when you click on links to open new items, for example to open a Ticket or Action from your home page, or to open up your Email Inbox page.

    You can choose between links opening in a new, dedicated browser tab or in your current browser tab.

    Watch this video to find out more:

    Single Browser Tab

    As a default, when you click on a link the new content will show up in the same browser tab, replacing the previous content.

    If you want to return to the previous page, you can use the browser's 'back' button to navigate back there, and equally use the forward link again to return to the newer screen.

    Some other features which can be helpful when working with a single tab approach… The 'recently viewed' list from your navigation section is always a useful way re-find work that you've been looking at recently. You can click to open up a fresh Home page at any time… And, you can even use your focus list to put together a list of work items that you want to concentrate on, perhaps as part of a focused daily to-do list.

    If you'd like to open a link in its own dedicated tab, you can right click on a link and select the 'open link in new tab' option from the subsequent menu.

    Or you can hold down the 'control' or 'command' button on your keyboard when clicking the link.

    This will open it in a new browser tab and leave the previous one as-is.

    If you'd prefer that the links you click on to open in new, different browser tabs, every time you click on a link, you can do this by .

    This means that you can view content in separate browser tabs and can have two sets of content open side by side, letting you, for example have your Email Inbox open at the same time as viewing a ticket or action, so you can read mails without swapping between screens. The browser tab will show information such as the work item reference and title.

    Each tab has a dedicated URL which means you can easily share links to specific work items to other team members. Just copy the URL and send it to them - when they open the link it will take them straight to that work item.

    When you perform an update on a Work Item that would close the tab, you'll be returned to the page that launched it, for example your home page or Email inbox page.

    If you want to change how the system opens up links, you can go to your user settings page and change the tabs behaviour.

    You'll see the 'Open Links in New Browser tab' option. This lets you decide how you would like the links you click on in Enate Work Manager to open - either in a new, dedicated browser tab or in your current browser tab.

    By default, this option is set to OFF, meaning that when you click on a link the new content displays in your current browser tab. If you'd prefer that the links you click on open in new, different browser tabs, switch this option to ON and save your change. Now when you click on links, you'll see that a new dedicated browser tab will open up to show that content.

    Setting Teams and Queues

    Overview

    As a Team Leader (someone who has people reporting to them in Enate), the Home page needs to know who reports to you and what Queues you are in charge of. These settings can be adjusted in the Queues page, which you can open from the navigation section.

    If you have no data set up yet, the page will open in Edit mode by default. Otherwise, it will show the Queues that you manage (along with the people who are working out of that Queue), and the list of people who report to you, i.e. your Team.

    Editing Queues

    You can Edit these settings as follows:

    • Add a Queue. You are also able to add yourself as a manager to a Queue. This includes Queues which may already be managed by a different Team Leader (you will now both be managers of this Queue).

    • Remove a Queue, i.e. unset yourself as the manager of a Queue.

    • Add / remove Team Members to one or more of your Queues.

    • Add and remove Robots to your Queues. You can add/remove all the robots (or just those selected) in a farm to a Queue at one time.

    • Set a mixed resource Queue to ‘Strict mode’ - In Queues where there is a mixture of human and robot resources, switching on 'Strict Mode' sets any human users in the Queue as fall-back resources only, only receiving work from here if its robots are for some reason currently unable to carry out the work in the Queue.

    Queues can be set to have more than one manager.

    Example: Consider Manager 1 and Manager 2 as two team leads where Manager 1 needs visibility on the Queue of Manager 2. Manager 1 can simply add the Queue of Manager 2 to his Queues page to have the visibility of the same Queue.

    Click on the edit option and add the specified Queue where it shows that the Queue is managed by Manager 2. This does not remove managerial responsibility from the current manager.

    If a Queue is managed by multiple people then the users that report to you are filtered under 'Managed by me' and the other users who report to the other person are filtered under 'Managed by others'.

    You can add and remove Users to 'My Team'. When you are adding users to your team, you do so by building up a list of the users who report to you.

    Related Group vs Linked Work Items

    Group of Related Work Items

    Related work items are a tightly connected group of items which, while they behave according to their own specific configuration, do have an active impact on their 'parent' work item - specifically the parent work item will not complete until all of its 'children' have completed first.

    Communications will be shared automatically between work items in the related group so they are always visible, and when you reply to an email in one work item, the reply can be seen in all the other work items.

    Additionally, files, links, defects, smart cards, and contacts are also shared automatically between all the work items in the group, so updating for example a file in one work item will update the file in all the other work items in the related group as well.

    Groups of Related work items include:

    • A Case and its Actions

    • A Case and its Sub Case(s)

    • The remaining Ticket and other 'resolved' Tickets if multiple Tickets have been merged

    • A 'child' Case and its parent Ticket if a Ticket has been converted to a Case

    When work items don't have an active impact on each other (i.e. they're not part of a Related Work Items group) but there's still a loose connection between them and you want to be able to quickly jump to one from another, you should use the Linked Work Item feature in Enate.

    Work items with a 'Linked' relationship behave according to their own specific configuration and do not need to wait for the other to complete before they can complete themselves. You can easily link two or more work items together at any time and it's a very useful, flexible way of loosely connecting together items so people in e.g. different departments can stay easily up to date on how other work connected to the Ticket/Case they're working on is going.

    Communications will also not be shared automatically between linked work items, but you can choose to copy a snapshot of the communications in one work item to a work item it is linked to.

    Note that you also have the option to share emails between linked work items -

    Additionally, the files, links, defects, custom data, and contacts will not be shared automatically when launching a new linked work item, but you can choose to copy a snapshot of them. Any updates made to these will not be reflected in the other linked work items.

    Work items with a linked relationship will show in the in Cases and Tickets.

    Using this type of connection is useful if e.g. a Case’s due date is not dependent on some other piece of work being completed (e.g. by a different department), but it's still considered useful for people working on either one to remain aware of activity on the other and, importantly, to have a quick point of accessing the other.

    Work Items can be linked together in the following ways:

    • A Case or a Ticket launched directly from within an existing Case or Ticket.

    • Manually adding a link from a Case/Ticket to another existing Case or Ticket.

    Sub Cases

    A Sub Case will behave according to its own specific configuration, but its “parent” Case will not complete until all of its Sub Cases have completed.

    You can therefore only create a Sub Case from an existing Case.

    To create a new Sub Case, click the ‘+ Work item’ link shown near the tabs section of a Case and the choose the 'Sub Case' option from the dropdown.

    In the resulting pop up, you can filter to search for the new type of Sub Case process you want to create in two ways:

    • by searching by email route - you can specify the mailbox address which people would normally send emails into to create work items. Often an email mailbox represent a certain part of the business within which you want to create your new work item. As a useful shortcut we've added a feature here where you can search by mailbox and narrow down straight away the Sub Case processes that you can choose from. Selecting a mailbox will filter the dropdown options to only the processes linked to that mailbox.

    'Peer Review' Actions

    Peer Review Actions are a great way to support situations where a different member of a team needs to crosscheck someone's work for key Actions within a Case.

    Peer Review Actions involve two parts:

    • The first part is completing the Action (i.e. performing the required activities), done by one user.

    • The second part involves reviewing the Action to check it was completed correctly - this is done by a different user.

    Watch this video for a quick overview about how to use Peer Review Actions in Work Manager:

    Contacts Page

    The Contacts Page is where you can view and manage all of your external contacts in one place.

    You can access the Contact Management page from the Navigation link. Your contacts and their information will be displayed in a table.

    Clicking on the first name link will open the .

    You can add contacts from the Contact Management page by clicking on the Create Contact icon and filling out the details for the contact in the resulting popup.

    You can import a list of contacts from an Excel spreadsheet in the Contact Management page. A template is provided and the template is supported in all of the languages that Enate offers.

    AI Email Classification Performance Report

    The AI Email Classification Performance Report displays information relating to EnateAI Email Classification, specifically showing how well this AI is performing in assessing and accurately classifying incoming emails which launch Tickets. Users may use this information as input into deciding if any adjustments should be made to AI settings, e.g. confidence levels set for requesting manual input.

    In order for the AI Email Classification report to show data, the corresponding ‘EnateAI Email Classification’ integration must be enabled in your system. This can be done in Enate's Marketplace in Builder. When this integration is running, incoming emails which result in a new ticket will generate the data needed for the report.

    Access to and the ability to edit the AI Email Classification Performance Report is controlled via User Roles, in the same way as all other reports within Enate. To edit the report users will need the 'Create Custom Reports' feature enabled.

    Here are some of the type of information which can be found within the report

    This graph displays the number of Tickets created by incoming emails.

    Assigning / Reassigning / Unassigning Work

    Both Team Leaders and Team Members, (provided the Team Member has been set up with the 'Can Assign' permission in Builder, see for more information) have the ability to assign/reassign one or more work items to themselves or to other members of their team. You can assign/reassign a work item to yourself in a number of ways:

    1) If the work item is not assigned to anyone, as soon as you start to do any activity which requires assignment the system will automatically assign the work to you (i.e. you do not need to manually set yourself as the assignee).

    2) If the work item is assigned to a different user, the system will display a short message when opening the work letting you know this. Click the ‘Take it’ grab icon to instantly assign the work item to yourself.

    3) From the homepage grid by selecting which work items you want to reassign to yourself and clicking on the 'Reassign' button that will have appeared at the top of the grid. This will open up a popup where you can can then select the 'Reassign to me' option and you can also add a note if you wish.

    If you open an unassigned work item and subsequently make a change which would result in it being auto-assigned to you, if during the interim period another user has opened the same work item and has already assigned to themselves, the system will display a warning popup explaining that if you assign the work to you, any unsaved changes from the other user will be lost.

    2 or more

    No

    Email to 1 email address in TO, another in CC field, and one in BCC field

    1 for each TO & CC address

    No

    *Email to 1 email address in TO and another in BCC field

    1 for TO field

    No

    Email to 1 or more email addresses in BCC only. Nothing in TO or CC fields.

    0

    Yes - for the BCC email mailbox

    Email to just 1 email address that is not correctly configured in Enate

    0

    Yes - for the non-configured email address

    Email to 1 email address that is not configured correctly in Enate and one email address configured in Enate

    1 for the configured email address

    No

    Any other contact on the work item

    Setting additional Default Tags on a Contact Record

    Default Contact Tag behaviour if set not to 'Allow Multiple'

    Additional notes about Supplier Company mismatches with Contact Tags:

    Auto-tagging of Contacts in Work Items

    Contacts populated from an initial email

    Known Contacts

    Unknown Contacts

    Contact tags populated from the Contact Activity Page

    General Settings >> Contact Tags
    'Enable Automatic Contact Creation' setting is set to ON in Builder
    'Enable Automatic Contact Creation' setting is set to ON in Builder
    'Enable Automatic Contact Creation' setting is set to OFF in Builder
    Contact Activity Page

    Linking Existing Work Items from within a Work Item

    Unlinking Work Items

    Linked Work tab
    Linked Work tab

    Note that for split Tickets, a snapshot of the files, links, defects, smart cards, and contacts of the parent are to its child Tickets, so updating for example a file in one work item will not update the file in all the other work items in the related group. However, the parent Ticket, which will have moved to a state of Waiting, will not complete until all of its 'child' Tickets have completed first. Also note that if the parent Ticket receives an incoming email, it will be copied to its child Tickets rather than shared.

    Linked Work Items

    see here for more information on how to share emails between linked work items.
    'Linked Work' tab

    Within the 'Tips' section of this pop-up, there is a link that will take users to the Unhandled Emails page of the Enate online help, should users require any more information.

    Applying the Rule to Existing Email (Run Retrospectively)

    Choosing a time range to select which existing Unhandled emails to reprocess.

    Important Note: Once you create a new email routing rule in this way via Work manager, it will instantly go live and start to run against any subsequent incoming emails.

    Admin Visibility of New Email Routing Rules in Builder

    Replying / forwarding emails

    Filtering Options

    Further options

    Please note: If the email you are attempting to download contains an attachment file which has been explicitly manually deleted by a user (for e.g. reasons of data sensitivity), the .eml download option will be disabled for that email - the system will display a message explaining the reason for this disabling when download icon is clicked.

    Email Attachments

    attachments
    Last Attempt To Send - when the last attempt to send the email was (automatically by the system or manually by a user)
  • Last Send Failure Message - a message displaying the reason why the last attempt to send the email failure e.g. The Email connector is disabled. Please enable it and try again.

  • Logged - the date and time recorded when the email first failed to send.

  • Next Attempt To Send - when the system will next try to send the email

  • Packet - the work item reference that the email is from. Clicking on this will take you to the work item screen.

  • Packet Type - if the email is related to a Ticket, Case or Action

  • Send Retry Count - this will show the number of times the system has tried to send the email. You can set this number in Builder, see here for more information.

  • Send Status - this shows what status emails in the outbox are in in terms of sending. There are 4 states:

    • Failed - an email with this Send Status has failed to send. In order to send it, it must be manually 'retried'.

    • Connector Disabled - if an email has this Send Status, it means that the Email Connector has been disabled in Builder. Click here for more information about how to switch it on.

    • Pending Retry - an email with this Send Status is awaiting automatic retry by the system.

    • Queued - an email with this Send Status is already scheduled to be sent. Emails send when an Undo Send option has been set will have this status too (). When these emails will be sent depends on the Automated Failure Retry Pattern option which is set in Builder, .

  • Attachment Count - how many (if any) files are attached to the email

  • Retry and Cancel Options

    Please note that the system will not automatically retry sending emails that have been migrated from an older version (2020.1 or older). These can only be sent by retrying manually, i.e. clicking the 'Retry' icon.

    Viewing an Email

    Adjusting Grid Columns

    see here for more information
    see here for more information

    If rework is performed multiple times then there may already be downstream steps that were previously completed - however they are not eligible for selection as restart point.

    From an Action

    Note: In order to re-evaluate the Case Conditions, rework must be started from the start of a step. Further specifics on this:

    • You cannot rework from an Action which was started as an ad-hoc Action.

    • Users are still limited to reworking from steps prior to the current one, and so are also limited to choosing Actions from within prior steps.

    • If rework is performed multiple times then there may already be downstream steps that were previously completed - however they are not eligible for selection as restart point.

    Auto-Assignment of Actions started while Case is in Rework

    Note: If 'Keep Actions with Me' is selected on the Case, the ‘keep with’ logic will take precedence.

  • by selecting a Customer, Contract, Service and a Sub Case process to launch (these will default in values if there is only one option to choose). Note that the Customer for a Sub Case will will be auto-filled as the same as its parent Case i.e. the Case you are creating it from.

  • You can then adjust the following settings for the Sub Case:

    Setting
    Detail

    Override Due Date

    If your system has been configured this way (), you can select to override the due date of the new Sub Case you are creating.

    Description

    You can modify the description of the new Sub Case you are creatin

    A link to the new Sub Case will appear in the Sub Cases tab and NOT in the Links tab.

    The Sub Cases tab will show the following information for any Sub Cases under a Case:

    • Current State icon

    • Sub Case reference number and Case title

    • Action Count – The count of Actions associated with this Sub-Case

    • Owner– the Case owner(If defined)

    • Queue – the Cases Queue (If defined)

    • Due Date – The Case due date

    • Icon to expand the Sub Case to reveal its Actions

    Reference numbers of Sub Cases can be broken down as follows:

    Creating a Sub Case

    Please note that the Sub Cases available for you to launch will depend on the permissions settings in Builder. Additionally, you will also only be able to select a Sub Case process from an email route that has been enabled in Builder (). You will also only be able to select a Sub Case process in if the email route for that Sub Case process has been .

    Please note that Defects, Files, Links & Custom Data will be automatically shared will be automatically shared from the parent Case to your new Sub Case. Communications from the parent Case, and its related work items, so its Action and Sub Cases (if it has any) will also be shared with the new Sub Case. However please note that emails will not be shared but you can easily see them by selecting the . Also note that making updates to the Defects, Files, Links, Custom Data or Communications in the new Sub Case WILL update update them in the parent Case too.

    Sub Cases Tab

    Sub-Case Reference Number Logic

    The Peer Review Action will first appear in a state of 'To Do' to the user who is tasked with completing the Action.

    The peer review symbol will let you know if you are completing an Action that is then going to be reviewed by a peer:

    The first user needs to complete the Action as normal and mark it as 'Resolved'.

    Once the Action has been completed and marked as 'Resolved', the Action is then assigned to a different user to review, back in a state of 'To Do'.

    If the user who resolved the Action tries to complete the peer review, they will be able to enter the Action screen but cannot edit the Action in any way. Additionally a message will appear informing them that since they were involved in delivering the Action, they are unable to perform the peer review.

    The peer review symbol will let you know if you are peer reviewing an Action that was completed by a colleague:

    When you are on the screen of the Action which is being peer reviewed, you'll see a Peer Review text box along the top, allowing the reviewer to add any overall comments relating to reviewing how the Action was completed.

    Once you have finished your review activity, switch the status of the Action to resolve and then choose if the review was a Pass, Fail or was Unable to be completed and then click to confirm.

    If you're happy to approve the activity, selecting 'Pass' will mark it as such and will close the Action on-screen. You can add a comment, but it is not mandatory.

    If you then click to re-display the action, you'll see that next to Peer Review it now says Passed, and any comments entered can be read.

    If the Action has not been done correctly, you should select 'Fail' and must add a comment in the Peer Review Comments section with the details of why.

    Submitting the review will then return this Action back to the user who carried out the original activity in a state of 'To Do'.

    When that original user opens the Action, they'll see 'Failed' next to the peer review, and will be able to read all of the comments left by the reviewer.

    Their role now is obviously to redo that activity to correct the issues raised, then once again mark it as resolved. It will then be routed through to the reviewer again to carry our another peer review.

    The other option is that the reviewer is unable to successfully carry out a review. In this circumstance they should select 'Unable to complete'. The system will then ask the reviewer to provide a reason as to why they were unable to complete the review.

    Once that has been provided, they can mark the Action as resolved.

    This closes the Action and marks it as 'not done successfully'. This escalates up to the Case, which will now display a warning symbol and the notification that the case needs intervention in order to move forward.

    It IS sometimes the case that the peer review activity gets automatically bypassed if it meets certain criteria set as part of the Case configuration.

    If that happens, then as soon as the manual Action is completed, the system will move straight on to the next Action and will avoid routing the work to someone to peer review.

    Further to this, a note will subsequently be displayed in the Actions list on the Case screen, showing that the peer review activity was not required.

    Overview

    Note: The person(s) who carried out the manual activity part of the Action will be stopped from also performing the peer review checking and approving activity, if they attempt to assign that to themselves to carry out.

    Step 1: Completing the Action

    Step 2: Reviewing the Action

    Note: The person who carried out the manual activity part of the Action will be stopped from also performing the peer review checking and approving activity, if they attempt to assign that to themselves to carry out.

    The checklist is only available when the Action is in a state of 'To Do' and only the assigned reviewer is able to edit the checklist.

    Passing the Review

    Failing the Review

    When Review is not possible

    Bypassing the Peer Review

    To edit a contact, go to the Contact Management page and double click on the contact to bring up the Edit Contact popup.

    You are also able to bulk edit the company, time zone, office location, preferred language of your contacts by selecting on the contact's tick box and the edit button will appear.

    To delete a contact, go to the Contact Management page and click on the contact's tick box and the delete button will appear. You are able to delete multiple contacts at once.

    You can choose which columns to see by by clicking on the cog icon and selecting from your list of Standard Columns.

    The Auto-created column option lets you see how external contacts have been created - if they have been created automatically or manually. Please note that once a contact that has been auto-created has had edits made to it, it will no longer display as an auto-created contact in the 'Auto Created' column of the Contact Management Page.

    You can add custom columns to the grid by clicking on the cog icon and selecting from your list of Custom Data Columns. Custom Data Columns are created in Builder (click here for more information). Fields of all data types can be created with the exception of Table fields and Long Text fields.

    You can sort the table by alphabetical order for a column by clicking on that column's title, and you can go back to the original selection of columns by clicking 'Revert to Defaults'.

    Overview

    Note: you will only be able to access the Contact Management Page if you have been set up with the relevant permissions in Enate Builder. See here for more information.

    Note: Access to this Contacts page is not switched on for standard Team Member and Team Leader Roles. To give users access to this feature, a Custom Role must be created via the User Management section of Builder, with the 'Contacts' option switched.

    Adding Contacts

    Adding an individual contact

    Adding multiple contacts

    Contact Activity page

    It is mandatory to fill in the email address when importing Contacts from an Excel template. If you don't specify a company, the contact will automatically be set to global. See here for more information about .

    Editing a Contact

    Deleting a Contact

    Adjusting Grid Settings

    This graph displays the percentage of incoming emails that created Tickets and were also classified by EnateAI Email Classification.

    This graph displays the number and percentage of AI classifications that were accepted by users.

    This graph displays the number and percentage of AI classifications where the Ticket Category selected was ultimately changed by an Agent.

    This graph displays the accuracy percentage levels across various level of AI confidence level. For example: “Ticket Categories selected with a confidence level of less than 50% were overridden 76.2% of the time. Ticket Categories selected with a confidence level of 80-90% and over were accurate 92.3% of the time”. This data is a good way to assess how accurate the AI’s assessment of its own findings are.

    This graph displays the volume of Tickets categorized by EnateAI Email Classification over a given time period, and the Accuracy levels for them, allowing you to view how the AI’s accuracy is changing over time.

    This graph displays the most frequent Ticket categories predicated by EnateAI Email Classification, split by correct vs re-categorized outcomes.

    This graph displays the AI predicted Ticket categories that are most frequently corrected by users.

    If you try to access the AI Classification Performance Report but do not have EnateAI features enabled, you will not be able to view the report and will be met with a pop-up explaining you will need to enable EnateAI features to access it.

    If you try to access the AI Classification Performance Report having enabled EnateAI features but not the EnateAI Email Classification integration, you will not be able to view the report and will be met with a pop-up explaining you will need to enable the integration.

    Setup required to use the AI Email Classification Performance Report

    It is important to note that data displayed in this report relates only to:

    • Incoming Emails that trigger Ticket creation AND

    • which have been classified by EnateAI Email Classification.

    Accessing the AI Email Classification Performance Report

    AI Classification Performance & Accuracy Report Structure

    Tickets from inbound emails

    Percentage of emails assessed by AI

    AI predictions accepted

    AI predictions overridden

    Accuracy by AI confidence level

    AI volume and accuracy trend

    Top AI predicted L3 categories

    Most overridden L3 categories

    What if EnateAI Email Classification has not been enabled?

    You have the choice to continue with assigning the work to you (which will discard the other person’s unsaved changes) or cancel your reassignment / update.

    Note that some activities can be performed even if the work is not assigned to you since they are purely additive:

    • Adding a Note

    • Sending an Email

    • Adding an Action while in a Case

    Both Team Leaders and Team Members, (provided the Team Member has been set up with the 'Can Assign' permission in Builder, see here for more information) have the ability to reassign one or more work items to themselves or to other members of their team. You can do this in a couple of ways.

    1) From the work item itself by clicking on the assignee dropdown in the header ribbon and selecting to reassign it to a different user. A popup will display; you can search for a user to assign work to and add a note to go along with the assignment. A notification message (including the note) will be sent to the new user.

    2) From the homepage grid by selecting which work items you want to reassign and clicking on the 'Reassign' button that will have appeared at the top of the grid. Clicking on reassign will open up a popup where you can search for which team member you wish to reassign the work items to, and you can also add a note if you wish.

    If a work item can be done by a robot, you can also choose to reassign the item to any individual bots that are in your team.

    You can also make that reassignment choice at the farm level by selecting ‘Any Bot within [farm name]’. The system will then automatically assign the work item to one of the bots in the farm.

    Both Team Leaders and Team Members are able to unassign one or more work items. You are able to unassign work items in any state apart from Closed.

    To unassign work items, select which work items you want to unassign from your Work Inbox. This will make the option to Reassign and Unassign appear at the top of the grid.

    Once you have unassigned the desired work items, they will then become available for users to pick up from their work Queue.

    If your system is set up to allow it, you are able to mark one or more work items from your Work Inbox as 'Complete' directly from the Work Inbox grid. Both Team Leaders and Team Members can use this function.

    Assigning / Reassigning a Work Item to Yourself

    Alerting users when work is assigned to someone else

    here

    Item Access vs. Assignment - Rules

    Reassigning work items to someone else

    Reassigning Work Items to a Bot

    Unassigning Work Items

    Completing Work Items

    Note: this is only possible for work items in your Work Inbox. Additionally, this is not possible for Cases or Peer Review Actions.

    Viewing Attachments

    Previewing Attachments

    Downloading Email Attachments

    From an Email

    From the Comms/Timeline

    From the Files Tab

    Deleting Email Attachments

    tags
    notes

    Checkbox Data

    Saving and Submitting

    Note: If a user enters the validation screen on an Action that is not assigned to them, the data will be in read only mode and can not be edited. To be able to edit the data, the user must first assign the Action to themselves.

    Current Limitations

    It is important to note that the defects feature isn't linked to the way the Enate system determines SLA information.

    Adding/Editing a Defect

    If you're finding that some options are missing from the category list, i.e. a type of issue is happening regularly but there isn't really a sensible category for it, feed this back to your business admins and request to get it added to the category list.

    Any user can add a defect and mark defects as resolved. However, be aware that if the 'Restrict Defect Modification' setting in the System Settings section of Builder is enabled, only the user who created the defect record can subsequently modify or delete a defect.

    Close this Ticket, merge it into another work item

    Please note: when choosing to close THIS Ticket and merge it into another work item, the work item you select as the destination must be currently running. If your search returns more than 50 results, only the most relevant top 50 will be displayed — add more search criteria to narrow down the results if your desired work item doesn't appear.

    Keep this Ticket open, merge other Tickets into it

    Please note: when choosing to close OTHER work items, you can only select Tickets, but you can select multiple Tickets at one time. If your search returns more than 50 results, only the most relevant top 50 will be displayed. If your desired work item does not appear in the top 50 results, add more search criteria to narrow down the results.

    Due Dates & Merging

    Keep this Ticket open (and merge other existing Tickets into this one)

    Multiple Browser Tabs

    If you're opening items from the Advanced Search page, save your search if you want to return to the page with the previous filters still set.

    Changing your preference in User Settings

    changing your User Settings

    Queues with multiple managers

    Editing My Team

    A user can only report to one Team Leader, so when you add a user to a team, you may be resetting who they report to – if they previously reported to a different Team Leader that will now be wiped and reset to you. They will no longer have that user report to them, and will not have visibility of the user (unless they are still in Queues that the Team Leader manages).

    configured to be startable from the Contact Activity Page in Builder
    company the contact has been scoped to
    company you as a user have been scoped to

    Operations Performance Overview

    The Operations Performance Overview is a single Power BI report inside Work Manager that brings together everything an operations lead needs to run a team day to day - volume, quality, SLA, user activity and email communications. Rather than jumping between separate reports, you get one report organised into six tabs, each answering a different operational question. These pages explains how to access the report, how row-level security controls what each user sees, and what every card and visual on each tab is telling you.

    The Operations Performance Overview report


    Report Structure:

    The report is made up of six tabs. Click the links to view each tab in detail:

    • Operations Summary

    If you would like to see a list of all of these cards across each of these tabs, plus the data sources for each, please check out .


    Access to the report, and the ability to edit it, is controlled by feature access in your User Role: If your role grants access, the report will appear in your Reports list, under Standard Reports.

    If you make a personalised copy of the report and save it, your copy will be found in My Reports.

    The Operations Performance Overview is aimed at the Team Leader standard role. It's available automatically to any user assigned the Team Leader role, and it can also be granted through a custom role that has this report selected in its permissions. Whichever way access is granted, what the user sees on the report is still governed by row-level security, described next.

    What each user sees (row-level security)

    The report applies row-level security, so two people opening the same report don't necessarily see the same numbers. The data is filtered to the scope your role and reporting line allow:

    • Role and permission scope - you see data for the customers, contracts and work you're permitted to view. The filters at the top of the report (customer, contract, service, queue, process, status etc.) let you narrow further, but they can't widen your access beyond your permitted scope.

    • Reporting-line scope on Agent Performance - the Agent Performance tab is built on the 'Insights Users' data set, which resolves to the logged-in Team Leader's own team: their direct and indirect reports. A team leader sees their people; they don't see agents outside their reporting line. Metrics such as Work Items Resolved Per User, the Agent Leader-board, Responsible Agents and Active Users all respect this scope.

    • Sharing - you can share the report with another user via the Share button, but only if that user already has permission to the datasets. If they don't have access, they won't see any data in the report.


    Every tab follows the same layout: a row of KPI cards across the top giving you the headline numbers, and a set of visuals (charts and tables) below that let you explore the detail. A few conventions apply across the whole report:

    Hovering over any bar, line, slice or KPI shows a tooltip: a small pop-up box that appears next to the cursor and explains exactly what you're looking at. It gives the precise figure behind the point you're hovering on plus its supporting detail.

    Every chart and visual in this report supports drill-through. Right-click (or use the drill controls in the visual header) to move between month, week and day on time-based charts, to drill into a category, or to open "See Records" / the underlying data as a table and export it to Excel.

    You can easily navigate back up from tables showing the underlying data:

    Hovering over a visual will usually bring up a 'Drill down' option in the tooltip.

    Click to drill in to view the next level visual for this data. Data in the other cards will filtering their display accordingly. Hover again for tooltip and click the 'Drill up' option to return to the original visual display level.

    Main Filter - use the filter bar at the top left of the report to focus the report by customer, contact, process (Case/Ticket/Action), queue or work state.

    To clear everything, open the main filter display and use Clear Filters.

    Click Segment to Filter

    Clicking on a segment within a card will filter down data in all of the other cards. The selected segment will highlight.

    De-select the segment to unfilter your data.

    All report dates use the UTC time zone.

    Closed work items are shown for the past year; open/running items show their full history even if that's longer than a year.

    Most KPI cards show a small trend badge - an up arrow (▲) or a down arrow (▼) - comparing the current period to the one immediately before it. The comparison window always matches the length of your selected date range: filter to the last 30 days and the badge compares against the previous 30 days.

    An up arrow means the metric has gone up versus the prior period and a down arrow means it has gone down. Whether that's good or bad depends on the metric. For SLA Compliance, % Utilisation or Work Items Closed, up is good. For Work Items Overdue, Defects, Reopens or Avg TAT, down is the improvement. Work Items On Target follows the same rule - more on-target work is better, so up is good.

    The badge is colour-coded by whether the movement is good or bad, not by its direction: green when the metric moved in a desired direction (whether that's up or down for that metric), red when it moved in the undesirable direction, and grey when there's no change or no comparable prior period (shown as "— No Change" or "--"). So a green ▼ on Overdue and a green ▲ on SLA both mean "good".

    How Quickfind works - specifics

    Some further explanation of how Quickfind works: There are three different kinds of searches going on in parallel when you are entering Quickfind search data:

    1) Specific search against reference number. This is based upon recognizing a known format of the system’s refence number for work items and then returning results related to Tickets, Cases, Actions which have that reference. You can just type the reference, e.g. ‘40308-T’ and the system will recognize it as a reference. You don’t need to enter a leading short code.

    Note: There's also support for certain formats of your own internal reference numbers. Specifically, Quickfind will recognize text strings made up of a series of digits and a '.' decimal point marker, up to 10 digit characters, i.e. with the format 'NNNNN.NNNNN', no matter where the '.' character appears within this string.

    2) Custom Data Field searches. As described above. The system will know to do this kind of search when you enter a known short code, e.g. ‘FN: ’. The search will be for a field which contains the specific value you enter. See further note below on Wildcards.

    3) Free text searching for work items, communications and people against anything else you enter which doesn’t conform to the first two types of recognized data. The system free text searches the individual words against various system attributes of work items, communication and people, e.g. work item title, email subject and body.

    4) 'Start with' searching for files - the system uses 'start with' logic for searching for files where it adds a wildcard to the END of search texts. This means that if you are searching for a file called 'Invoice Processing.docx', searches for 'processing' would not find the file, but searches for 'invoice' would.

    When searching, the system will add a wildcard to the END of search texts, but not the start.

    For Custom Data Searches specifically, an example of behaviour would be: searching for e.g. “p:John Smi” would find items with the value “John Smith” in a field ‘person’ but searching just for “p:Smith” would NOT find it.

    In short: With Custom Data Field searches, we’re searching for the precise value of the field, or the start of the value. Free text searches aren’t quite the same as this, since a free text search will try to match against each individual word within a text value to get a match, rather than the value as a whole.

    Wildcards are added to the end of reference number searches also.

    While you are typing in Quickfind, the system will wildcard search against the very last word, e.g. if you’re free text search typing: "John return prio", the system will wildcard the last word and would also bring back results with e.g. ‘priority’.

    Once you’ve pressed the space bar the system will conclude you’ve finished typing that word and will search against it without a trailing wildcard.

    In order to retain system performance, the following are ignored from searches:

    • Words of 1 to 2 characters.

    • Words in the system 'Stop List'. These are standard common words such as ‘and’ ‘the’, ‘me’ etc., which would otherwise return too many results. Please see here for the (in Quickfind and indeed in any other system searches).

    • Specific characters which are set to be ignored, e.g. “*”, “?”, “@” etc. in Quckfind specifically. Please see here for a . This will mean for example that when searching for customer.com in Quickfind, the words 'customer' and 'com' would be searched for. As such, it’s recommended to place such word combinations in quotes to search for them as a specific phrase - i.e. searching for “customer.com” will likely bring back the results you are looking for.

    Quickfind is a text-driven search. Entering dates in the text strings may bring back inconsistent results. Use “quotes” where possible if such searching is necessary to help the search look for entire strings of characters such as "search for where this entire string occurs".

    Use the date sliders to search for results in specific date ranges.

    When searching for multiple words, the search will be using an ‘AND’ logic rather than ‘OR’, i.e. bring back items with 'Apple' AND 'Banana' AND 'Pear'.

    It’s important to note that Quickfind performs three independent searches,

    • one for for work items (Cases, Actions, Tickets),

    • one for the Emails that may relate to them, and

    • one for people.

    An effect of this can be that if you are e.g. searching against a combination of three words, e.g. 'apple' and 'banana' and 'pear', Quickfind will return results of any work items where all three words occur, and separately any emails where all three words occur. Situations where two of the words appear in the work item, and the third only in an associated email, would NOT be brought back by either search.

    The specific attributes which the work item searches are performed against are as follows:

    • Work Item Reference

    • Title

    • Customer Name

    • Supplier Name

    The specific attributes which the Communications searches are performed against are as follows:

    • Email Title

    • Email Body

    • Email Addresses (From, To, CC, BCC)

    • Internal Note Body (for notes added in Enate / Self Service).

    The Insights Popup

    If Insights is switched on in your system (see Enabling Insights), when users log into Work Manager for the first time each day, they'll be met with a popup after a short while, asking them to confirm:

    • Their working hours for the day, e.g. 8 hrs (this may default in a value from their working calendar if one is set for them, or from the previous day's entered value.

    • a rundown of any non-core activities they may have planned for the day, for example a training session, or 1-2-1 meetings, plus their expected working hours for the day.

    • optionally, they can note down how they're currently feeling too.

    There are three sections to the popup, which will ask users about:

    • Today - what their working hours and break is for today, plus if they have any non-core work activities planned.

    • Yesterday - confirm if the data they entered yesterday ended up being correct, amending if needed.

    • Tomorrow - if they have visibility on what tomorrow looks like, they can fill this in too.

    Note that users don't have to fill in their data straight away when the popup appears - they can always revisit the popup later in the day by clicking on the Insights link in their toolbar. If data is incomplete for that user, it will show with a red dot icon..

    They can also fill in and amend data via the main 'Insights' page, which they can get to from the nav icon.

    The user can either provide the data in the pop-up pages then and there, or click 'X' to close the popup without saving any data. If a user hasn't filled in the data in the pop-up and they they logout and log back in again on the same day, the pop-up will reappear when they log back in.

    This section is optional - users can select an emoji to represent how they are feeling. They can also choose to enter an additional comment.

    The next section is asking the user to confirm their overall working hours for the day. There may be defaulted numbers in for your expected working hours (e.g. 8 hours) and expected break (e.g. 1 hour). These may come from the working calendar if one has been set up in Enate, or from whatever values were entered the previous day. If not such data is available, these will default to 08:00 hrs and 00:00 hrs respectively.

    If either of these these need to be changed, clicking the link provided takes the user to the where they can set this information.

    There's also the option to set this day as:

    • A Non-working day - e.g. a weekend day or time-in-lieu equivalent

    • On leave - i.e. the user is on leave / vacation that day.*

    *Note that users can set this information a number of days in advance via the main Insights page if e.g. they are going on vacation.

    If either of the 'Non-Working Daya / On-Leave' settings are marked for this day, the user won't be asked to fill in a break-out of their time for that day.

    The next sections of the pop-up will ask the user for expected time they'll be spending that day on non-core activities. Users can use the slider or manually enter a value between 0 and 8 hrs.

    Options available to enter for 'Today' are:

    • Meetings - time spent in any collaborative gathering or group meeting.

    • Feedback / 1-2-1 - time spent in individual sessions with e.g. team leader, manager, mentor.

    • Training - time in organised training or knowledge-transfer sessions.

    • Other - time spent on any other activities which are not listed above, or any additional breaks taken in a day.

    When finished filling in data (including if there are no such activities and the day is free for active work), users have two options:

    Click 'Save & Close' to close the popup and get back to Enate Home Screen OR

    Click 'Save & Next' to add further data for yesterday (prev. working day) and Tomorrow.

    If they click 'Save and Close', they are done and the system will mark their mandatory Insights data as filled in for that day. Clicking 'Save & Next'

    Confirming data for yesterday / the previous working day is much the same as entering for today..

    In addition to the categories available for 'Today', two further options are available to confirm where time was spent:

    • Active Time not tracked by Enate - Time spent actively working to provide service but where a Ticket, Case or Action screen (or Enate email) is NOT open in Enate to auto-track this time.

      Examples might be: time spent on the Enate homepage or working in another system where an Enate work item tab is not open and so not auto-tracking time. This does NOT include activities such as meetings or training, which should be noted separately.

    • Downtime - Time lost due to, e.g. system issues, or non-availability of work.

    All data can be modified, including the working hours and break times. If all expected hours entered the day before were correct, the user can hit 'Save and Next'. Otherwise, adjust the data before moving on.

    Entering data for tomorrow gives the same options as entering for 'Today'

    Once fully complete, users shoud click 'Save and Done'.

    At any point users can click back to the popup to adjust data enetered for today, yesterday & tomorrow, and can access the .

    Unhandled Emails

    Overview

    All emails arriving into Enate get automatically processed into either Tickets or Cases based on business rules which look at things like where it's sent into, who it's from and what it's about. Occasionally though, emails arrive into Enate and do not get processed into a Case or a Ticket.

    This can happen due to the following reasons:

    1. None of the To and/or CC email addresses have a matching email route defined for them in Builder (that's the rules which say which kind of Ticket or Case an incoming email should generate).

    2. There are only BCC email addresses in the email, no To or CC addresses.

    If there any such emails in your area of the business, you'll see an icon in your header bar showing you how many.

    This will show the total number of currently unhandled emails and, if you click the link will also show a popup showing how many of these have arrived in the past 24 hours, plus a link to take you straight to the Unhandled emails section of your Email Inbox page (alternatively you can find it within your Email Inbox view).

    The Unhandled Emails view in the Email Inbox section in Work Manager allows users to review these unhandled emails and take the appropriate steps. This option is visible to all users.

    You'll see emails that have failed to process into a Case or Ticket (i.e. they're unhandled) which have come into the mailbox that your area of the business works out of. Other unhandled emails which arrive into mailboxes that aren't linked to any of your business processes will be seen by users in other areas of your business.

    More specifically, if you have permissions on a process connected to an email route, you'll see the unhandled emails for any email that comes into that email connector, even if its from a different route.

    The number next to this section shows the total number of emails in the unhandled email view.

    You can filter the emails in this section by:

    • Mailbox Address

    • Mailbox Name (if you know it). Specifically, this is the email address of the mailbox which handles the incoming mails.

    • Date, i.e. the date which the email arrived.

    The Unhandled Emails view will let you review the incoming email's content to help you determine where you should route.

    Once you've determined where it should go, you've got a couple of options:

    1) You can decide to create a work item from the email, specifying a Customer, Contract & Service for it, before launching the work item. If you do this, the email will be changed to 'Processed' and will be removed from the Unhandled Emails view when you next click to refresh your email inbox.

    2) You can decide to delete the email if appropriate (for example if it's a spam mail). If you do this, the email will be changed to 'Deleted' and will be removed from the Unhandled Emails view when you next click to refresh your email inbox.

    There's also an option to delete multiple emails in Bulk. Click on one or more boxes and a delete button will appear next to the filter, along with the number of emails selected.

    If you find yourself regularly having to pick up unhandled mails and route them into the same tickets or cases again and again, you've got a couple of options:

    • You can speak with your Business Admin to see if a new can be set in order to catch these emails and automatically create the relevant Work Item for them.

    • Alternatively, you can resolve the issue at source and create a simple Email Routing Rule yourself, from within the Unhandled Emails view. See '' for how to do this.

    And, for more information about how Enate processes incoming emails, .

    Saving an Email as a Draft

    Overview

    To make your email work more flexible we've added the ability to save your emails as drafts if you're not quite ready to send them. Now when you are writing an email in a work item, you can choose to save the email as a draft and come back to it later.

    When you are writing an email in a work item, you can choose to save the email as a draft and come back to it later. Drafts will be saved for a maximum of 90 days.

    Note that you cannot save an email as a draft that exceeds the size set in Builder - see here for more information.

    Viewing Draft Emails

    If you have the Drafts filter in the comms/timeline tab switched on (note that this will be switched on automatically by default upon upgrade), you will see any saved draft emails for that work item in the comms/timeline.

    You'll see who created the draft and when and the first few lines of the email.

    If you click to expand the view, you'll also see the email address that the draft will be sent from, the address it will be sent to, any CC or BCC email addresses, the subject of the email, any attachments and the full email content if these have been added when the draft was saved.

    You can edit a draft email from the timeline by clicking 'Update Draft'. This will open up the email editor where you can edit your draft. Note that you can only edit or delete a draft email from the work item it belongs to.

    You also have the options to delete the draft, to open the email in a pop-out window or to print it.

    Multiple users can work on the same draft, just not at the same time. A single work item can have multiple draft emails. These can all be seen and edited from the work item's comms/timeline.

    When a draft already exists for a work item, the system will alert you to this when you start writing a new email so you can choose whether you want to continue writing your new email or whether you would like to edit the draft email instead.

    If a work item has a draft email and you merge or convert a Ticket to a Case, you will be able to see the draft email in the comms/timeline or all work items in the related group as long as the 'Drafts' filter and the 'Include Related Work Items' filter are switched on.

    The draft email will show in the timeline with the reference number of the work item it belongs to.

    Note that draft emails will not be copied across when copying communications to a new linked work item, even when the 'Copy communications' option is enabled.

    An attachment icon in the draft email comms/timeline entry shows you if any files have been attached to the draft email.

    Clicking to expand the comms/timeline view will show you the name of the attachment and give you the option to download it.

    Additionally, any files attached to draft emails will show in the files tab and be marked with a draft icon. You can view, download or delete files attached to draft emails from here. Note that you cannot add notes or tags to files attached to draft emails.

    User Insights Report

    The User Insights report provides information about a team such as when they are due to go on leave and how they are feeling. This allows team leaders to take prompt action and make adjustments to cover any team absences or drops in team morale.

    Access to and the ability to edit the User Insights is controlled by permissions in user roles, in the same way as all other reports within Enate. If users do not have the right permissions enabled, they will not be able to access or edit the report.

    Here are some of the type of information which can be found within the report

    • Optimize resource management by exploring your team's leave dynamics.

    Team Bar for Team Leaders

    On the right hand side of the is the Team Bar.

    If you are a Team Leader, the Team Bar shows you , your and your .

    At the top of the Team Bar you can see the people in your team and, for each of them:

    • The amount of work they have outstanding (number in centre of pie-chart)

    If you are going to be using the Insights feature, every user should ensure that they have confirmed their data for any day they are working. Team Leaders have visibility on who has not filled in data, and on which days.

    Filling in the Insights Popup

    The 'How are you feeling?' section

    Working Hours confirmation section

    Activity Breakdown section - Today

    What Should I fill in for the Insights Activities?

    For clarity here: This section is where you should add any time which you know can't be spent actively working to deliver service because you have e.g a meeting. The expectation is absolutely not that you add in numbers to add up to e.g. 7 hours to 'fill your day' - doing that would signal to your Team Leader that you've no availability to work.

    Instead, this is where you enter that e.g. you know you've got 2 hours of meetings today, so your Team Leader will know that of the 7 working hours left in your day after breaks, only 5 of them can be time available to actively work.

    Confirming Yesterday's Activities

    Entering Data for Tomorrow

    Main Insights Page
    Main Insights Page
    company scoping

    Accessing the Report & Row-Level Security

    Who this report is for

    Note: The exact data each Team Leader sees (which customers, contracts and how far down the reporting line) comes from your User Role and the hierarchy configuration and your permissions to see part of that hierarchy. Confirm the specific mapping against your own setup before publishing.

    How to Read This Report

    Tooltips on every visual

    Drill-through on every visual

    Drill down and Drill Up

    Filters

    Dates are UTC

    Important Note: Report data isn't real-time; it refreshes on a schedule and the last-updated time stamp is shown on the report.

    Closed vs Open history

    Understanding the KPI trend indicators ▲▼

    Volume & Workload
    Quality & Defects
    SLA & Cycle Time
    Agent Performance
    Communications
    this link

    Attaching files to draft emails

    Contract Name

  • Service Name

  • Service Line Name

  • Process Type Name

  • Wildcards for open searching

    Running Wildcards while typing

    Other search terms ignored

    Further things to note for Quickfind

    Specifics of Searches against Work Items vs Emails

    full stop list of words which are ignored in searches
    full list of the characters which are ignored

    Strategically plan downtime using public holidays and breaks for work scheduling.

    • Understand team productivity through efficiency analysis and time allocation metrics.

    • Enhance performance by assessing team morale and fostering a positive work environment.

    • Cultivate consistent success with daily mood assessments, promoting productivity and positivity.

    See below for a complete list of all the available data fields that can be used within the User Insights report:

    Table
    Fields
    Description

    Date

    Accessing the User Insights Report

    User Insights Report Default Structure

    Leave

    Non-working days & Public Holidays

    Where Time is Spent

    Overall sentiment

    Sentiment trend

    Available Data Fields for User Insights

    The due status of that work (i.e. Red/Amber/Green)
  • Their current availability status (available or offline)

  • You can see the availability status of your Team Members - so if they are online or offline.

    The system tracks your active Enate browser session, and so is able to check if they are still logged into Enate.

    An important point is that this available / offline status is for informational purposes only – it is not taken into account as part of any allocation rules - i.e. the ‘Who does it go to?’ settings.

    You can filter the display of your team to show available / offline / all users.

    You can sort your team members by work item status criteria including:

    • Least / Most Work (Total)

    • Least / Most Overdue (Amber)

    • Least / Most Overdue (Red)

    • Least / Most On Target (Green)

    • You can use this to help identify resources which are stretched and other team member who you may be able to share work out among to help balance workloads.

    Free text search also allows for you to search for individual users from the list.

    Clicking on a team member from the Team Bar, will bring up their user profile. The grid filters down to show only work items currently assigned to that user.

    The homepage bar chart will be replaced to show the amount of work that is assigned to the user (the number in centre of pie-chart), as well as the due status of that work (i.e. Red/Amber/Green), You will also see the user's profile picture, their role title, its description (if one has been added), and if you click on the 'More about this role' link, you'll see a list showing which features that the user has access to.

    You can close the view and return to the standard bar chart view of all work items by clicking the 'X' icon.

    If you find yourself needing to change the levels of access for yourself or users in your team, speak to your system admin.

    If you are a Team Leader you will also be able to see your bots in the Team Bar. This shows you any Robots which are available to work on items you manage / work with, grouped by Robot farm.

    Each row displays a different robot farm, along with their Technology (e.g. UiPath, Automation Anywhere, Blue Prism etc.).

    The number of ‘bottable’ work items lined up for the robot farm will be displayed, as well as the estimated amount of work left available for the robot farm in minutes.

    If any of the Robots in the farm are offline or unresponsive, a warning icon will be displayed.

    Additionally, it's possible that some of the bottable work items for these bots are outside of this user's permissions. If that is the case then a warning 'i' icon and message will be displayed informing the user of this.

    Clicking on a Robot farm in the Bots section swaps out the bar chart main display to show that group of robots AND filters down the grid results to show ‘bottable’ work items.

    In this view, Team Leaders can:

    • See the status of individual robots within the robot farm:

      • Idle - the bot is available for work

      • Offline - if your bot uses deep integration, such as UiPath orchestration synchronisation, an offline status means that your IT system can't connect with the bot. In this situation you would reassign the bot's work items to other resources. If your bot does not use deep integration, such as Blue Prism, an offline status means that your IT system hasn't connected with the bot for a certain amount of time.

      • Suspended – the bot’s average work is not within standard deviation, so it has been paused

      • Busy Integrated – the bot is busy working on a task that is has been assigned to

      • Busy Independent- the bot is busy working on a task that it has not been assigned to

    • View the work currently being done by individual robots

    • Filter down the view to an individual robot

    • See how much work is remaining for the bots to do (both in volume, e.g. 20 items, and in how many minutes worth of work is remaining, i.e. how long we think it will take to complete all of those 20 items).

    • The system can make an estimate of the amount of work left in minutes because we have an ‘estimated duration’ value configured in Builder for different Actions. The system simply totals the value of these for the Actions currently available for the robots to do.

    The grid will show projected start and end times for each piece of work, colour-coding the projected end date to show it if will breach the due datetime – this helps the Team Leader determine if they need to add further human / robot resources in order to meet SLAs.

    The view can be closed to return to the standard bar chart view of all work items.

    How does the system determine which work item to give a ROBOT when they send in a “Get more work" request?

    The system works by looking at all unassigned Action work items from all of the Queues the robot is linked to and for which the robot's farm is set as the relevant farm in the 'General Settings' configured for that action (the equivalent of Robot permissions), then from this list determines the one due soonest, and assigns the Action to the Robot.

    Exception: If a robot is already listed as working on an Action and yet sends in a "Get more work" request to Enate, the system will send back a response to the Robot of that same Action - effectively reiterating that the bot should carry out that Action. The system will do this a total of 3 times if the robot continues to send such requests while still supposedly 'occupied', and on the next such request will take the Action off the robot, mark it to be allocated to a human rather than a robot, and will then proceed with the normal logic of assigning the robot the soonest due Action from the list of ones it can perform.

    At the foot of the Team Bar you can see the amount of work which is sitting unassigned in the Queues you manage, grouped by Queue. This includes information about the amount of work in each Queue that is unassigned (the number in centre of pie-chart), as well as the due status of that work (i.e. Red/Amber/Green).

    If you have unassigned work which is overdue – i.e. any red items in this section – you should be looking to deal with that situation.

    My Team

    home page
    your team
    bots
    unassigned work

    My Team Display Options

    Available / Offline Status for Team Members

    Note: if you do not log out properly, i.e. shut down the browser or machine directly without logging out of Enate, the system will display you as still online for the duration of the standard system timeout (usually 30 minutes).

    Sorting by work item status

    Searching for team members

    Viewing an Individual User

    Bots

    Viewing an Individual Bot Farm

    Unassigned Work

    Schedule

    If your system has been configured this way (see here for more information), you must select a schedule for the new Sub Case you are creating.

    Adding Contacts

    You can add multiple different contacts for the new Sub Case and divide the tags between them as you need.

    see here for more information
    see here for more information
    Test Mode
    configured to run in Test Mode
    'Include related work items' option in the timeline

    The Unhandled Email section of Email Inbox view

    What emails do I see?

    Filter Options

    What options do I have?

    Bulk Delete Option

    Unhandled Emails - Additional Notes

    Note that it is not currently possible to append an unhandled email to an existing work item, only to create a new work item. However once you have done this, you can still use the merge feature to merge it in with an existing work item.

    Note: Users will be able to create a new work item from an unhandled email on this page even if they do not have the 'Can Create' permission set for them.

    Patterns to look out for - resolve with new Routing Rules

    Email Route
    Creating New Email Routes from Unhandled Emails
    see this section
    see here for more information about the Undo Send option
    see here for more information

    Files Tab

    Overview

    The files tab shows all of the files and links that have been added to that work item and its related work items, plus attachments for incoming and outgoing emails.

    Any files/links for the current work item which is open are displayed at the top of the files tab, and any for its related work items are shown in a separated section below this. Items are sorted by the date/time they were uploaded with the most recent at the top.

    You can see the name of the file, what type of file it is, its size, who uploaded it (and when), plus the reference number and of the work item it was uploaded to. You can also see the tags and notes that have been added to the files.

    Various icons help you to identify further information:

    • Standard file attachments are denoted with a paperclip icon:

    • Links are denoted with a links icon:

    • Attachments from incoming emails are denoted with a green email icon:

    • Attachments from outgoing emails are denoted with a blue email icon:

    All files in the files tab are available to and links are available to add to the email body.

    If the work item is assigned to you, you can add files and links to a work item in the Files tab. Multiple files can be uploaded at one time. Click the upload links at the top of the tab to upload.

    You can also drag and drop files into the files tab to upload them.

    By default, all types of files can be uploaded, however filetypes can be restricted by specifying acceptable types in the section of Builder.

    Tags can be added to files and links. Tagging is very helpful to add more structure to your files information, and opens up features such as auto-attaching files with certain tags to emails being auto-sent by the system, and to canned responses in mails you're composing. They also allow external automation routines to know which specific files to pick up from a work item.

    Tagging files is also an important feature for processes which involve automation technology. Example: if a downstream automated Action needs to know which of the files you’ve attached to your Case is the ‘Invoice Confirmation’ file, you can tag the relevant files as such and, no matter the file name, the automation technology would know to select that file based on its tag. Such external automation technology can equally well supply tags as part of uploading documents into Work Items in Enate for further downstream manual / automated use.

    The tag titles available to you are . If you're regularly finding that a specific tag is not available to select, make sure to speak to your admin team about getting it added.

    You can add a tag to a file by clicking on the '+' icon and then selecting a tag from the resulting list.

    You can also add tags to multiple files and links at once by selecting one or more items and using the icon which are then displayed in the Files tab header.

    Enate can also help with automated tagging of email attachments. Various options are available in the section of Enate Builder to enable components (from Enate as well as third party ones) which analyse incoming mail content, including being able to suggest tags for email attachments based on their contents.

    If your admin has switched on an auto-tagging component, you'll see some extra bits of info in the file tag section, where automated suggestions of tag values for an attachment have been made.

    If the technology you're using is confident enough about its tagging suggestion, the tag will appear in green. If you agree with the suggestion, you don't need to do anything, but if disagree with it, you can simply click to change it.

    And if the technology was less confident in its tag suggestion, the tag will be highlighted in orange. If you agree with the suggested tag, make sure to confirm it, otherwise change it to your preference. Every time you do this, the technology will learn and get a little bit better at suggesting tags. If you notice that the technology is regularly getting its suggestions wrong, speak to your admin team about modifying the confidence threshold.

    Once tags have been added, the files/links will become available for auto-adding to emails with matching tags, allowing you to ensure that all documents of a relevant type are included with specific emails / email body content.

    When a text is inserted into a manual email or when a new email is auto-created and sent in-process, the system will identify any tags linked to the canned text / email template and will then auto-attach all of that work item’s files which share the same tag. Tags are linked to the canned response / email content as part of system configuration by administrator users in Builder when creating .

    You can also add notes to files and links to provide a brief description of the content or to provide any other information that might be useful.

    You can also add notes to multiple files and links at once by selecting one or more items and using the icon which are then displayed in the Files tab header.

    The menu on the right lets you preview an individual file. The preview will open in a new tab.

    You can download individual files by clicking on the option in the menu on the right.

    You can download multiple files at once by selecting the files you wish to download and selecting the option at the top of the screen. These can be downloaded as multiple individual files or as a single compressed ZIP file via the ZIP download option here.

    You can delete files or links individually by clicking on the menu on the right.

    You can also delete multiple files/links by selecting the files/links you wish to remove and selecting the delete option at the top of the screen.

    You can filter the files and links being displayed in the files tab by using the filter option at the top. You can filter by: Attachments, Outgoing Email Attachments, Incoming Email Attachments and Links.

    There's also a freetext search available to help you locate individual files or links. You can search based on the various text groups on display - Filename, Tag info and Notes texts.

    Bar Chart and Grid

    Due Date Totals

    Work items are classified into their respective due states:

    • Green – on target, not yet overdue

    • Amber – due today (but not yet overdue)

    • Red – work items which are now overdue (including items where the due date is today, but the due time has now passed).

    • Grey – work items are classified into a state of 'Not Set' when the due date is not currently known. This can be in the following situations:

      • When the work item has just been started (manually) but has not yet been submitted

      • When the work item is in a state of ‘Wait for more Information’ AND is set to add the wait time on the due date

    If you click on one of the due dates, the grid will be filtered down to work items with just that due date:

    Bar Chart information is displayed in a Pareto format, i.e. with highest volumes shown first. A maximum of ten bars are displayed. The top nine groups are displayed uniquely, with all remaining items shown combined in the final bar.

    The ‘Display By’ choice for the bar chart is also accessed via the grid settings link. This will bring up the 'Display and Column Settings’ popup. The ‘Display By’ options for the bar chart can be found at the top. You can select a standard system information column to display the bar chart by.

    The standard system information by which you can display the bar chart display is as follows:

    1. Action Type – this shows the Action type, either as send email or as a manual Action.

    2. Assigned To – this shows who the Action has been assigned to.

    3. Contract Name – this shows the name of the contract.

    If your system has been configured with them, you can also choose to select a custom data column to display the bar chart by.

    Custom Data fields of the following types can be used to display information in the bar chart:

    • Short Text

    • List (simple list only)

    • Checkbox

    You can return to the system defaults by selecting 'Revert to Defaults' in the 'Display and Column Settings’ popup.

    Clicking on a bar name within the chart filters the grid to those results.

    Clicking on a specific R/A/G section within an individual bar filters the grid results down to the items in that state.

    ​Icons in the homepage grid let you know the state of the work item and give you high-level information about them. ​

    These icons also appear when you search for a work item in Quickfind.

    They denote the following information:

    And they denote the following information about the status of the work item:

    You can find more information about the states a Ticket goes through , the states of a Case and the states of an Action .

    You are able to choose which work items you can see on the home page by selecting Work Inbox, Owned Work, Team Work Inbox, or Team Owned Work.

    Generally, if a work item is assigned to you or one of your team members, or it's in a state of To Do or In Progress, you'll see it in the Inboxes. Everything else, such as items in a Wait state, you'll find in the Owned Work views. The sections below go into this in a bit more detail.

    The Work Inbox view shows you which work items are currently assigned to you.

    The Owned Work view displays work items for which you are the Owner, rather than the current assignee.

    These are work items which may not necessarily be assigned to you (or anyone) right now, but for which you have longer-term responsibility for, e.g. Cases.

    Long term responsibility refers to the person responsible for the entire Case journey. This includes its Actions, the status changes of the Cases and its Actions, as well as the delivery of the Case.

    A Case can be owned by using Keep with me.

    The Team Work Inbox view shows you all the work items which are assigned to you or one of your team members, or it's in a state of To Do or In Progress.

    The Team Owned Work view shows you all work items that are owned by your Team i.e. Cases started by them, and Cases in states such as Wait for more information, Schedule for follow up, etc.

    See the table below for a more detailed breakout of scenarios:

    Work Item Context
    Where it displays

    You can reorder the columns in the home page grid according to your preference. This column order will persist when doing multiple searches, as well as when you log out and log back in.

    Column widths can be manually adjusted, and data can be sorted by a particular column by clicking on the name in column header. Click it again to cycle though ascending, descending and no sort.

    You can display additional columns in the grid by selecting them from the standard columns section in the left hand side of the 'Display and Column Settings’ popup. The mandatory columns are shown in grey.

    The list of standard system attributes you can display as grid columns which are available in the home page grids include :

    1. Action Type – this shows the Action type, either as a send email or as a manual Action-type.

    2. Assigned To – this shows who the Action has been assigned to.

    3. Contract Name – this shows the name of the contract.

    You can also revert the column settings to default if you wish by selecting 'Revert to Defaults'.

    You can display additional custom columns in the Home page grid by selecting them from Custom Data Columns section in the right-hand side of the 'Display and Column Settings’ popup. Custom Data Columns are created in Builder, see for more information.

    The number total at the top right of the grid show the total number of items in the grid and, when filtering, the number of filtered items from that total.

    In-grid filtering

    You can apply filters to all the standard and custom data columns on the grid by clicking on the filter icon next to the desired column title.

    Your applied filters will remain when switching between your Work Inbox, your Team Work Inbox, your Owned Work and your Team Owned Work, as well as after the you log out and log back in.

    You can clear the applied filters by clicking on the 'clear filter' icon, and all work items will be displayed again.

    You can also apply multiple filters to all the standard and custom data columns on your bot farm grid. The applied filters will remain when switching back to your Team Work Inbox.

    You can also search the grid by using the free text search function.

    You can copy and paste information from the grid into an Excel spreadsheet by selecting the information you want to copy and using Ctrl C and Ctrl V.

    The information that is copied and pasted includes any applied filters. The column titles will automatically be copied and pasted as well.

    You are also able to copy and paste all of the information in the grid by using Ctrl-A.

    Quickfind

    You can use Quickfind to search for people, work items, communications and files.

    By default, Quickfind will search against all four categories of people, work items, communications and files, but you can focus down to searching just one of these categories by selecting from the left-hand dropdown in the Quickfind header.

    Searching for Work Items

    You can search for work items (i.e. Tickets. Cases and Actions) by entering key words relating to them into Quickfind.

    If you have many results, then you can choose to filter your search down further by choosing to search by Ticket, Case or Action specifically.

    Work item search results will display the reference, title, process name, work item status, due date (with Red/Amber/Green colour-coding), plus the name of the person to whom the item is currently assigned.

    Additionally, you can filter the search by start date using the slider provided, from Today through to Past Year, plus specific date ranges.

    Hovering over a work item row in Quick find will display a ‘Take It’ icon. Instantly assign this work item to yourself by clicking on this icon.

    Clicking on the work item will open it in a new tab.

    You can search for contacts by searching for first name, last name, company and email address.

    Additionally, further people-extended properties can be added to the system and all text/string properties can be searchable within Quickfind. For example, you might have a 3rd party contact with the attributes ‘Country Name’ etc. which will be searchable in the Quickfind.

    The criteria which can be searched against, e.g. ‘Employee Number’, are displayed as the records are returned in the Quickfind results, in the line underneath the contact name.

    If you have many results, then you could filter it by clicking on ‘Contact’ or ‘User’. When you click on contact, the system will only show contacts with search criteria.

    Clicking on a person will open the where you can view current and historic activity - work items related to that person - all their communications, and start new work for them.

    If you are searching for a new contact which does not currently exist in the system, you can create a new contact from Quickfind itself. Navigate to the people search function in Quickfind and click on ‘add a contact’.

    When you click on ‘add a contact’, the system will decode and auto-populate the first name, last name and email address. Once you fill in all the information and click on create, you will be taken to the of the new contact.

    You can search communications (i.e. emails, notes and Self Service communications) by entering key words from the email subject, body text or contact details (To, From, Cc, Bc), or key words from the note or Self Service communication you are searching for.

    You can choose to filter you results even further by selecting the communication type i.e. incoming email, outgoing email, note, self-service comment by clicking on top icons.

    You can also use the slider to filter by received/sent date (from Today through to Past Year, plus specific date ranges).

    Search results will be sorted by the date that the email was sent/received, with the most recent at the top.

    Email search results will include details such as the To/From address (depending on whether the email was sent or received), an icon to indicate if the email was sent or received (if the email was sent from you or your team the icon will be green and if the email was received by you or a member of your team the icon will be blue), the email subject and the first few lines of the email body, as well as the email sent/received time.

    Note search results display the writer of the note, the first few lines of the note and when the note was written.

    Clicking on the communication will open the work item which it is linked to in a new tab.

    You can use Quickfind to search for individual files or to search for a work item by searching for one of its files. Searching for files in Quickfind will search for both files that are directly linked to the work item AND files that have been attached to communications for the work item.

    The search results will be sorted by the date that the file was last updated on or when the email was sent/received if the file is a communication attachment, with the most recent at the top.

    Search results will include details such as the type of file (i.e. whether it was attached to the work item or to a communication), when the work item was last updated if the file is attached to a work item or when the email was sent/received if the file is a communication attachment, the reference number and title of the work item(s) the file is attached to and the communication subject if the file is a communication attachment.

    Clicking on the file will download a copy of it and clicking on the work item reference will open the work item the file is attached to in a new tab.

    Forecasting for Cases

    For users on v2024.1, they will be able to use the forecasting feature to provide more accurate estimated efforts for work items, enabling you to plan resource requirements more effectively.

    In the long term, this data can be collated and fed back to admin users to adjust estimated effort timers and to provide more accurate forecasting for future work volumes.

    Once the 'Forecasting' feature has been switched on, a new ‘Effort Estimation’ tab will appear in Cases in Work Manager.

    Here you'll see a summary of the estimated effort for the whole Case, a breakdown of the estimated effort for Actions or Sub Cases that make up the Case, and a breakdown of the estimated effort for Actions or Sub Cases that have not been created yet.

    The 'Case Effort Summary' section is where a user can change the estimated time for the Case. It also provides other useful metrics for the Case.

    Reports

    Enate's Work Manager provides you with embedded reporting capabilities, driven by , which gives you lots of additional information at your disposal to gain new insights and support for your business operations.

    You get:

    • based on Enate data. Your user role will determine which standard reports you are able to see

    • The ability to build on the standard reports to with exactly what you want

    Processing an Action

    An Action in Enate will begin in a status of 'To Do' until a resource has picked it up. This could be a human resource or a robot resource.

    Unlike a Ticket or a Case, an Action is never in a status of Draft. Enate creates it in To Do.

    Once you start updating an Action sitting in this state, it will:

    • automatically assign to you and

    • the status will change to 'In progress'

    You can also choose to change the state yourself. This signifies that work is now underway and it will stay in 'In Progress' until it's resolved, assuming for example no waiting for further information.

    Adding, Editing and Deleting Contacts

    External contacts can be created in Enate in several ways.

    The Enate system can be set to automatically create new external Contact records when incoming emails arrive which contain new email addresses if the .

    The system will auto-populate the first name and last name of the contact based on the email display name. More specifics on this:

    • If there is a space in the email display name, anything before the first space will be used as the contact's first name and anything after the last space will be used as their last name. For example, if the email display name is 'John Smith' then the contact's first name will be auto-filled as 'John' and their last name will be auto-filled as 'Smith'.

    Agent Performance

    Throughput, handling time, utilisation and how each agent spends their day. As noted under Row-Level Security, this tab is scoped to the logged-in manager's reporting line (i.e. you see your own team, not the wider operation).

    Agent Performance tab.

    KPI cards

    • Work Items Resolved Per User - average items resolved per agent across the team - a throughput-per-head measure.

    • AHT in Hrs -

    average handling time per item for the team.
  • % Utilisation - share of tracked working hours that was productive (not break or downtime).

  • % Productivity - share of the working day spent on actual work, including time logged in Enate and related work done outside the system.

  • Visuals

    • Agent Leaderboard - per-agent table of items resolved, utilisation %, productivity %, SLA % and AHT.

    • Time Allocation Breakdown - stacked columns showing how time splits across Working, Ad Hoc, Break, Downtime, Outside Enate, Feedback, Meeting and Training. Drills month → week → day.

    • Responsible Agents - agents ranked by how many work items they picked up.

    • Active Users Trend - daily active agents over time; dips can indicate leave, absence or access issues.

    Agent Performance

    Date

    Day of the week in DDMM Format

    Date

    Week

    Week of the year

    Date

    Month

    Month of the Year in MMYY format

    Date

    Year

    Calendar Year

    Sentiment type

    Sentiment

    Sentiments options (Excellent, Very Good, Good, Bad, Worse). It will be none if not entered.

    Insights

    Avg. other hours

    Avg. hours spent on ad hoc tasks

    Insights

    Avg. contractual break hours

    Avg. hours spent on breaks

    Insights

    Avg. idle hours

    Avg. hours spent on system downtime

    Insights

    Avg. feedback/1-2-1 hours

    Avg. hours spent on feedback sessions

    Insights

    Avg. work performed within Enate

    Avg. hours spent in Enate (on cases, actions or tickets)

    Insights

    Avg. work performed outside Enate

    Avg. value added hours spent outside the Enate

    Insights

    Avg. meeting hours

    Avg. hours spent on meetings

    Insights

    Avg. training hours

    Avg. hours spent on training sessions

    Insights

    Avg. working hours

    Avg. working hours

    Insights

    Other hours

    Total hours spent on adhoc tasks

    Insights

    Contractual break hours

    Total hours spent on breaks

    Insights

    Idle hours

    Total hours spent on system downtime

    Insights

    Feedback/1-2-1 hours

    Total hours spent on feedback sessions

    Insights

    Work performed within Enate

    Total hours spent in Enate (specifically on Cases, Actions or Tickets)

    Insights

    Work performed outside Enate

    Total value-added hours spent outside the Enate

    Insights

    Leaves count

    Planned leave count for the user(s)

    Insights

    Meeting hours

    Total hours spent on meetings

    Insights

    Non-working days count

    Non-working day count for the user(s) includes holidays weekends etc

    Insights

    Sentiment count

    Count of sentiments entered by user(s) for a particular day

    Insights

    Training hours

    Total hours spent on training sessions

    Insights

    Working hours

    Total working hours

    Insights

    Comment

    Comments added by user for the sentiment chosen

    Insights

    Insights date

    Date when the durations/sentiments captured from the user

    Users

    Email address

    Email address of the user(s)

    Users

    User name

    Full name of the user(s)

    WorkDay type

    Work day

    Type of the day (Working, Non-working Day, Leave). It will be none if nothing is chosen by the user.

    Last Updated By – human/digital worker who last updated this item.
  • Last Updated On – datetime when this item was last updated by a human/digital worker. The datetime on which custom data field values are updated is stored in the Enate database and can be used for subsequent reporting.

  • Owned By – name of the user who currently has ultimate responsibility for the work item.

  • Parent Process Name – if this an Action, this shows the parent Case.

  • Process Name – the business process the work item is part of, e.g. ‘Maternity Request Process’.

  • Queue – the work Queue which Cases/Tickets/Actions get sent to based on their routing rule.

  • Service Line – the overall area of the business this work item runs under, e.g. ‘Payroll’.

  • Service Provider – the company delivering service for this work item, usually your company.

  • Started By – this shows who the Action was started by.

  • Started By Method – how the work began, e.g. incoming email, automatic schedule, manually, etc.

  • State – current state of the work item e.g. Running, Waiting for more Information, Resolved etc.

  • Work Item Type – i.e. Case, Action or Ticket.

  • ​​

    Case only : Case is in a problem State (i.e. needs attention)

    ​​

    The Action is a Peer Review and it is in the "doing" stage.

    ​​

    The Action is a Peer Review and it is in either in the reviewing stage, or the review is complete.

    ​​

    Work Item is in a state of WAIT

    ​​

    Work Item is in a state of RESOLVED

    ​​

    Work Item is in a state of CLOSED

    Case with the “Problem” flags set that is configured to use Queues

    Inbox

    Any Action in a To do / In Progress state that is configured to use Queues

    Inbox

    Any Ticket in a To do / In Progress state that is configured to use Queues

    Inbox

    Any Case in a To do / In Progress state with an Owner that does not have the “More Information” or “Problem” flag set that is configured to use Queues

    Owned Work

    Any Case/Ticket/Action in a Wait State with an Owner where Queues are configured

    Owned Work

    Any Case/Ticket/Action in a Wait State with an Owner where Queues are not configured

    Owned Work

    Any Case/Ticket/Action in a Wait State without an Owner where Queues are configured

    Owned Work

    Any Case/Ticket/Action in a Wait State without an Owner where Queues are not configured

    Not displayed

    Tickets placed in a Wait State at the same time as changing the Category where Queues are configured

    Owned Work

    Tickets placed in a Wait State at the same time as changing the Category where Queues are not configured

    Not displayed

    Tickets already in a Wait State when the Category is changed where Queues are configured

    Owned Work

    Tickets already in a Wait State when the Category is changed where Queues are not configured

    Not displayed

    Cases automatically created by Schedule that no User has ever updated where Queues are configured

    Owned Work

    Cases automatically created by Schedule that no User has ever updated where Queues are not configured

    Not displayed

    Case/Ticket/Action without an Assigned User or Owner where Queues are not configured

    Not displayed

    Customer – this shows the name of the customer.
  • Due – this shows when the Action is due.

  • Has Been Reopened - this shows if a work item has been reopened or not.

  • Initial Request On - this shows the start date of the original request. This is particularly useful in situations where a further work item has been created from the original request (when a Sub Case is created, when a Ticket is converted into a Case, when a Case or Action gets reworked, when an Action is created via the 'Start Action' option or when a new linked work item is created), as it allows you to see the entire length of time it is taking to complete a request, as opposed to just the length of time an individual work item has been being worked on.

  • Is Overdue - this shows if a work item is overdue

  • Last Email Received - the date and time the last email of a work item was received

  • Last Email Sender - the details of the last person who sent an email relating to a work item. If the user is already in the system, this column will display their name, otherwise this column will display their email address.

  • Last Reopened By - if a work item has been reopened, this shows the person who last reopened the work item.

  • Last Reopened On - if a work item has been reopened, this shows the date when the work items was last reopened.

  • Last Updated By – human/digital worker who updated this item last time.

  • Last Updated On – datetime when this item was last updated by a human/digital worker. The datetime on which custom data field values are updated is stored in the Enate database and can be used for subsequent reporting.

  • Original Requester Email – the email address of the original requester of a work item, i.e. the person who initially raised the request.

  • Original Requester Name – the name of the original requester of a work item, i.e. the person who initially raised the request.

  • Owned By – name of the user who currently has ultimate responsibility for the work item.

  • Overdue By Days - this shows the number of days a work item is overdue by.

  • Parent Process Name – if this an Action, this shows the parent Case.

  • Parent Reference – reference number of the work item which started this one, e.g. parent Case.

  • Primary Contact Email - the email address of the primary contact of a work item

  • Primary Contact Name - the name of the primary contact of a work item

  • Process Name – the business process the work item is part of, e.g. ‘Maternity Request Process’.

  • Queue – the work Queue which Cases/Tickets/Actions get sent to based on their routing rule.

  • Reference – the unique reference number e.g. 101342-T.

  • Requester Email - the email address of the requester of a work item

  • Requester Name - the name of the requester of a work item

  • Resolution Method - this shows how a work item was Resolved e.g. if has been done successfully, if it was resolved by a Case being launched, if it was resolved by Tickets being merged etc.

  • Service Line – the overall area of the business this work item runs under, e.g. ‘Payroll’.

  • Service Name – the service instance the work item runs under, e.g. ACME French Payroll.

  • Service Provider – the company delivering service for this work item, usually your company.

  • Started – this shows when the Action was started.

  • Started By – this shows who the Action was started by.

  • Started By Method – how the work began, e.g. incoming email, automatic schedule, manually.

  • Status - the current state of the work item e.g. In Progress, Waiting, Resolved etc.

  • Status Reason - this shows the reason the work item's status was updated e.g. if it was updated by a resource, if it was updated by Enate, if it has newly been created etc.

  • Subject Email - the email address of the subject of a work item

  • Subject Name - the name of the subject of a work item

  • Ticket Category Level 1 – high-level categorisation of type of Ticket e.g. ‘Healthcare Request’.

  • Ticket Category Level 2 – next level categorisation of type of Ticket e.g. ‘International Travel Coverage’.

  • Ticket Category Level 3 – most detailed-level categorisation of type of Ticket e.g. ‘Eligibility Query’.

  • Time Remaining When Paused – the amount of time left before the due date at the point the item was placed into a paused state.

  • Title – a brief text description of the work item, often the subject of the original email.

  • Wait Type - if a work item is in a state of Waiting, this column will show the type of Waiting the work item is in e.g. Wait for more information, Wait Until, etc.

  • Work Item Type – i.e. Case, Action or Ticket.

  • Task can be carried out by a Robot

    ​​

    Robot Task – Needs Attention

    ​​

    New information has been received that hasn't been read yet.

    ​​

    Work Item is in a state of DRAFT

    ​

    Work Item is in a state of TO DO

    ​​

    Work Item is in a state of IN PROGRESS

    Any Case/Ticket/Action with an Assigned User

    Inbox

    Any Case/Ticket/Action with the “More Information” flag set that is configured to use Queues

    Bar Chart

    Bar Chart ‘Display By’ Options

    Displaying by Custom Data Fields

    Note: When you choose to display information in the bar chart by a certain item (standard system property or custom data field), that item will be added to the main grid display as an additional column.

    Grid

    Grid Icons

    Grid Display Options

    Note: The RAG volumes and bar charts are shown independently for each of these views, and so the displays of each will also change when you flip from one grid view to the other.

    Work Inboxes

    Understanding Work Inboxes in the Homepage Grid Dialogue

    Let’s have a look at using Work Inboxes in the Homepage Grid where you can see the Tickets, Actions and Cases which are in progress.

    There are four views for these work items: Your Work Inbox, Your Owned Work, Your TEAM’s Work Inbox, and your Team’s Owned Work.

    The principle here is this: If an item is in a state can be worked on (i.e. it’s tagged as ‘To Do’, ‘In Progress’ or in initial ‘Draft’), and it’s assigned to you, it’s shown in your Work Inbox (or in your Team’s inbox if it’s assigned to someone in your Team).

    In order to keep Work Inboxes focused purely on work that can actually be PROGRESSED, any work items NOT in one of those states shows up in the ‘Owned Work’ views instead. They’re still OWNED by your or a team member, but they’re waiting on something else, for example on an email response from a client.

    The approach should be to focus on items in your Work Inbox, as they’re sitting with you and are supposed to be getting actioned. Aim to keep your Work Inbox volumes low, and get the required actionable activities all complete for those items.

    Work Items can only have one assignee at a time, so if it’s in your Work Inbox it’s not in anyone else’s, and it’s your responsibility to get it done. If no one is assigned to a Work Item, it shows in the ‘Unassigned Work’ views, split by whatever Queue it’s sitting in.

    Similarly, items sitting in your Owned Work only have one owner set at a time, so if it’s in your Owned Work it means you’re tagged as the longer-term responsible person for this item right now.

    Each of these four views alters the work items displayed on the homepage grid, so what you see updates as you switch between them.

    New Work Items can arrive in your Work Inbox in a number of ways:

    If you hit ‘Pull Work from Queues’ button, the system will search for unassigned work you can do and will give you the one Due soonest. Alternatively, someone may MANUALLY assign a work item to you, or you may even assign the work item to yourself. And any work items which come off of their ‘Wait’ state for any reason will move out of the ‘Owned Work’ view and land in the ‘Work Inbox’ view.

    You can adjust the data shown in the grid in a number of ways, using various ‘click to filter’ options, free text search filtering, and changing the sort order. You can also change the columns shown in the grid and reorder those columns as desired, and expand it to display full-screen.

    Owned Work

    Please note:

    • Actions can only have an Owner if they are in a state of Pause e.g. states such as Wait for more information, Schedule for follow-up, etc.

    • There can be only one Owner of a Case at any one point

    Team Work Inbox

    Team Owned Work

    Note: If you are a Team Member who prefers a focused view of your Inbox and you do not want to see the Peers and Queue work, then please ask your manager to switch off these views for you. Your view after login will then only show items in your Inbox / Owned Work.

    Grid Column Options

    Displaying Additional Grid Columns

    Custom Data Columns

    Grid Filtering

    Searching the grid

    Copy/Paste into Excel

    here
    here
    here
    here

    Inbox

    'Total Case Estimated Effort' effort shows the total estimated time that the Case is estimated to take. This can be updated by a user with a more accurate estimate.

    • It is the sum of the ‘Estimated’ effort of all the created work and the Actions (and Sub Case Actions) that make up the Case and the and the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' value

    • The field will will initially show the manual ‘Initial Estimated Effort Per Record’ value from Builder (if there is one) multiplied by the record count

      • If the ‘Record Count’ gets updated, the ‘Estimated Effort’ for the Case that has not been updated by a Work Manager user will be updated to reflect the change in record count.

    • Once the Case is in a state of Resolved or Closed, its estimated effort can no longer be changed.

    • Note that increasing this value will increase the ‘Effort for Work Not Yet Created’ estimate and vice versa.

  • ‘Total Case Actual Effort’ effort shows the amount of time that has been spent working on the Case Effort for Work Not Yet Created.

    • It is the sum of the 'Actual' effort for all the created Actions and Sub Cases that make up the Case, taken from their respective Time Trackers.

  • ‘Total Case Remaining Effort’ shows the amount of time estimated to be left on the Case.

    • It is the sum of the 'Total Remaining Effort' effort for all the created Actions and Sub Cases that make up the Case AND the estimated remaining time for work that has yet to be created (therefore it might not always equal the 'Case Estimated' effort minus the 'Case Actual' effort).

  • Changing the 'Estimated' effort value for a Case has the following effects:

    • Automatic update to the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' estimated value. This is because the ‘Estimated Effort’ for the Case is a calculated value made up of the sum of the ‘Estimated’ effort of all the created work and the Actions (and Sub Case Actions) that make up the Case and the and the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' value.

      • Increasing the 'Estimated' effort for a Case increases the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' value by the same amount

      • Decreasing the 'Estimated' effort for a Case decreases the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' value by the same amount

    The 'Effort Breakdown for Created Work' section is where a user can change the estimated time for the individual created Actions (and Sub Cases) that make up the Case. It also shows other useful metrics for each of the created Actions (and Sub Cases) that make up the Case.

    Note that once an Action is in a state of Resolved or Closed, its estimated effort can no longer be changed.

    As Actions (and Sub Cases) get created, the estimated effort for them will be taken from the Estimated effort value from the Work Not Yet Created section below.

    Action Breakdown

    For each Action, you'll see:

    • A link to each Action

    • 'Estimated' effort that shows the total estimated time that the Action is estimated to take. This can be updated by a user with a more accurate estimate.

      • The field will will initially show the manual ‘Initial Estimated Effort Per Record’ value from Builder multiplied by the record count

        • If the ‘Record Count’ gets updated, the ‘Estimated Effort’ for any running Actions that have not been updated by a Work Manager user will be updated to reflect the change in record count.

      • Increasing this value will decrease the ‘Work Not Yet Created’ estimate and vice versa and therefore might affect the total 'Case Estimated' effort

      • Note that once an Action is in a state of Resolved or Closed, its estimated effort can no longer be changed.

    • ‘Actual’ effort shows the amount of time that has so far been spent working on that Action

      • The value is taken from the Time Tracker of the Action.

    • ‘Estimated Remaining’ shows the amount of time estimated to be left on the Action.

      • It is calculated by subtracting the 'Actual' effort for the Action from the 'Estimated' effort.

    • The due date of the Action

      • You'll also see a 'Start By' value if the 'Actual' effort is currently zero. This value show when is the absolute latest that the Action can be started by in order to meet its due date.

    • The status of the Action

    Changing the 'Estimated' effort value for an Action has the following effects:

    • Automatic update to the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' estimated value for the Case.

    • Possible automatic update to the 'Estimated' effort for the whole Case

    Details:

    • Decreasing the 'Estimated' effort for an Action increases the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' value for the Case by the same amount (leaving the 'Estimated' effort for the whole Case the same).

    • Increasing the 'Estimated' effort for an Action decreases the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' value for the Case by the same amount. This may or may not affect the 'Estimated' effort for the overall Case.

      • If the updated ‘Estimated Effort’ on an Action doesn't increase by enough to cause the ‘Effort for Work Not Yet Created’ value for the Case to go below 0, the 'Estimated' effort for the Case will not be affected

        • Example: let's say that the 'Estimated' effort for Action 1 is 2 hours, the estimated 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' is 1 hour and the 'Estimated Effort' for the Case is 3. A user decides that Action 1 is going to take 1 hour more and so updated the 'Estimated' effort for Action 1 from 2 to 3 hours. 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' will decrease from 1 hour to 0 and the 'Estimated' effort for the Case will not change - it will stay at 3 hours.

      • If the updated ‘Estimated Effort’ on an Action increases enough to cause the ‘Effort for Work Not Yet Created’ value for the Case to go below 0, the difference should be added to the ‘Estimated Effort’ of the overall Case.

        • Example: let's say that a Case only has one Action created for it called Action 1. The 'Estimated' effort for Action 1 is 2 hours, the estimated 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' is 0 and therefore the 'Estimated Effort' for the whole Case is 2 hours. A user decides that Action 1 is going to take 1 hour more and so updates the 'Estimated' effort for Action 1 from 2 to 3 hours. Because 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' is 0, the 'Estimated' effort for the overall Case is therefore going to increase by 1 hour from 2 to 3 hours.

        • Example 2: let's say that a Case only has one Action created for it called Action 1. The 'Estimated' effort for Action 1 is 2 hours, the estimated 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' is 1 hour and therefore the 'Estimated Effort' for the whole Case is 3 hours. A user decides that Action 1 is going to take 2 more hours and so updates the 'Estimated' effort for Action 1 from 2 to 4 hours, causing the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' to decrease by 1 hour from 1 to 0 (decreasing as far as it can). The "remaining" 1 hour will effectively be added to the total 'Estimated' effort of the Case that will increase by 1 hour to from 3 to 4 hours.

    Sub Case Breakdown

    If a Sub Case gets created, you'll see:

    • A link to the Sub Case if you have permission to access it (otherwise you'll just see the name and reference number of the Sub Case with no link)

    • A Sub Case "total" row with the following:

      • 'Estimated' effort shows the total estimated time that the Sub Case is estimated to take. This can be updated by a user with a more accurate estimate.

        • It is the sum of the ‘Estimated’ effort of all the created and yet-to-be created Actions that make up the Sub Case.

        • The field will initially show the manual ‘’ value from Builder multiplied by the

          • If the ‘Record Count’ gets updated, the ‘Estimated Effort’ for the Sub Case that has not been updated by a Work Manager user will be updated to reflect the change in record count.

        • Once a Sub Case is in a state of Resolved or Closed, its estimated effort can no longer be changed.

        • Note that increasing this value will increase the ‘Work Not Yet Created’ estimate for the Sub Case and vice versa.

      • ‘Actual’ effort shows the amount of time that has so far been spent working on the Sub Case.

        • It is the sum of the 'Actual' effort for all the created Actions that make up the Sub Case, taken from their respective Time Trackers.

      • ‘Estimated Remaining’ shows the amount of time estimated to be left on the Sub Case.

        • It is the sum of the 'Estimated Remaining' effort for all the created Actions that make up the Sub Case AND the estimated remaining time for work that has yet to be created for that Sub Case (therefore it might not always equal the 'Sub Case Estimated' effort minus the 'Sub Case Actual' effort)

        • The due date of the Sub Case

        • The status of the Sub Case

    • A row for each Sub Case Action with the following:

      • 'Estimated' effort shows the total estimated time that the Sub Case Action is estimated to take. This can be updated by a user with a more accurate estimate.

        • The field will will initially show the manual ‘’ value from Builder multiplied by the

    • A row for 'Sub Case Work Note Yet Created' with the following:

      • 'Estimated' effort shows how much effort is estimated to be needed to complete the Sub Case Actions that have not yet been created for that Sub Case. This can be updated by a user with a more accurate estimate.

        • Changing this estimate will affect the total 'Sub Case Estimated' effort and might affect the effort estimate for the overall Case

    Changing the 'Estimated' effort value for a Sub Case Action has the following effects:

    • Automatic update to the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' estimated value for the Sub Case.

    • Possible automatic update to the 'Estimated' effort for the whole Sub Case

    • Possible automatic update to the 'Estimated' effort for the whole parent Case.

    Details:

    • Decreasing the 'Estimated' effort for a Sub Case Action increases the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' value for the Sub Case by the same amount (leaving the 'Estimated' effort for the whole Sub Case the same and therefore having no impact on the 'Estimated' effort for the whole parent Case).

    • Increasing the 'Estimated' effort for a Sub Case Action decreases the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' value for the Sub Case by the same amount. This may or may not affect the 'Estimated' effort for the overall Case.

      • If the updated ‘Estimated Effort’ on a Sub Case Action doesn't increase by enough to cause the ‘Effort for Work Not Yet Created’ value for the Sub Case to go below 0, the 'Estimated' effort for the Sub Case will not be affected (and therefore the 'Estimated' effort for the whole parent Case will not be affected).

        • Example: let's say that a Sub Case only has one Action created for it called Sub Case Action 1. The 'Estimated' effort for Sub Case Action 1 is 2 hours and the estimated 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' for the Sub Case is 1 hour, therefore the 'Estimated Effort' for the Sub Case is 3 hours. A user decides that Sub Case Action 1 is going to take 1 hour more and so updates the 'Estimated' effort for Sub Case Action 1 from 2 to 3 hours, causing the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' for the Sub Case to decrease from 1 hour to 0. The 'Estimated' effort for the Sub Case will not change - it will stay at 3 hours (and therefore the 'Estimated' effort for the whole parent Case will not be affected).

      • If the updated ‘Estimated Effort’ on a Sub Case Action increases enough to cause the ‘Effort for Work Not Yet Created’ value for the Sub Case to go below 0, the difference should be added to the ‘Estimated Effort’ of the overall Sub Case, (and therefore might impact the 'Estimated' effort for the whole parent Case).

        • Example: let's say that a Sub Case only has one Action created for it called Sub Case Action 1. The 'Estimated' effort for Sub Case Action 1 is 2 hours and the estimated 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' for the Sub Case is 0, therefore the 'Estimated' effort for the overall Sub Case is 2 hours. A user decides that Sub Case Action 1 is going to take 1 more hour and so updates the 'Estimated' effort for Sub Case Action 1 from 2 to 3 hours. Because 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' for the Sub Case is 0, the 'Estimated' effort for the Sub Case is going to increase by 1 hour from 2 to 3 hours.

          • If there is enough time in the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' of the parent Case, this 1 hour increase might be taken from there, therefore there will be no impact on the 'Estimated' effort for the whole parent Case.

    The 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' section shows how much effort is estimated to be needed to complete Actions (and Sub Cases Actions) that have not yet been created for this Case.

    It is calculated by subtracting the sum of the 'Estimated' effort for created work from the 'Estimated' effort for the Case. Therefore, increasing the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' will increase the effort estimate for the overall Case and vice versa.

    As Actions (and Sub Cases) get created, the estimated effort for them will be taken from the 'Estimated Effort for Work Not Yet Created' value.

    Once the Case is in a state of Resolved or Closed, the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' can no longer be changed.

    Overview

    How to use 'Forecasting'

    Case Effort Summary

    Effort Breakdown for Created Work

    Effort for Work Not Yet Created

    The ability to save your personalized reports so you can easily navigate back to them

  • The ability to share your reports with whoever you think needs to see it

  • Team Leaders or users with the 'Can customize reports' permission will also get access to advanced editing options which allows them to create brand new visuals and to delete visuals, as well as the ability to create and delete cards

  • Watch this video to find out more:

    You can access reports from the brand new section in the Work Manager the nav menu.

    Clicking on the main Reports link will open up the Reports page, with the default standard report depending on your role displayed. For Team Leaders this will be the Team View report and for Team Members it will be the User's Overview report.

    If you hover over the Reports link, you'll see a list of reports that you have access to, divided into various sections:

    • Standard Reports - here you'll see the standard, out of the box reports associated with your role data. Your user role will determine which standard reports you are able to see - generally, if you're someone with team member level access, you'll see the 'User's Overview' report, which shows data about your own work and if you've got more team leader-like access, you'll also be able to see the 'Team View', which looks at data about work across your team.

    • My Reports - here you'll see reports that you have personalized in some way and then saved as a new report

    • Shared with Me - these are reports, custom or standard, that have been shared with you by someone else

    Reports are sorted alphabetically and you can mark a report as a favorite. Favorite reports will appear above your 'non-favorite' reports.

    Once you've opened up a report, you'll see the report name and when it was last updated at the top.

    The 'All Reports' button will show you the list of reports that you have access to, divided into various sections:

    • Standard Reports - these are standard, out of the box reports associated with your role data.

    • My Reports - here you'll reports that you have personalized in some way and then saved as a new report

    • Shared with Me - these are reports, custom or standard, that have been shared with you by someone else

    You can save a personalized report by clicking the 'Save As' option and you can share a report via the Share button.

    A report will generally contain a mixture of cards, showing you headline level information, and a number of visuals.

    The data fields you'll have access to will depend on the report you have access to - each report has its own set of data fields. If you have access to a report, you have access to all of the data fields within the report too. For example, the 'User's Overview' report, and any report which was created from it, displays data about you and your work. The Team View report or, again, any report created from it, allows access to data about your team and the work in your business area more generally.

    If there are any of your custom data fields that you'd like to see in your reports, ask your admin to get in touch with Enate Customer Support to get these made available for you.

    All users have the ability to personalize a report to get the data to show just how they want, for example by applying filters or by adjusting the data fields. See the personalizing a report section to find out more about what options you have.

    If you have the 'Can customize reports' permission, you'll be able to click on 'Advanced' mode and get access to more advanced editing options, which includes all the standard personalization options as well the ability to create brand new visuals, to delete visuals, and to create and delete cards.

    All users have the ability to personalize a report to get the data to show just how they want.

    There are a number of filter options at the top that you can apply to the report. You can choose to filter the report by, customers, contacts and so forth, plus specific types of Case or Ticket (under the Process dropdown) and certain Queues or work in a given state. If you want to remove all these filters, click on the main Filter display button and scroll down to find the Clear Filters link.

    Hovering over a visual also gives you further editing options. Links in the header of each visual will let you drill down and apply further filters.

    If you click on the personalize link you'll see much more options that you have to play with. You can change the visualisation type to show your data in a different way and you can change the data fields used in the visual.

    The data fields you'll have access to will depend on the report you have access to - each report has its own set of data fields. If you have access to a report, you have access to all of the data fields within the report too.

    For example, the 'User's Overview' report, and any report which was created from it, displays data about you and your work. The Team View report or, again, any report created from it, allows access to data about your team and the work in your business area more generally.

    If there are any of your custom data fields that you'd like to see in your reports, ask your admin to get in touch with Enate Customer Support to get these made available for you.

    You can also export an individual visual into Excel. There's also a 'focus' option to give a dedicated view of a single visual, and you can also choose to see the underlying data in a table.

    You can easily discard your changes at any time by reverting back to the previous view of a visual.

    You can find out more about the editing options you have from Microsoft's own Power BI documentation, available here:

    You can also save a personalized report by clicking the 'Save As' option, making it easier for you to come back to, and you can share a report via the Share button.

    You can save your personalized report so that you can access it easily ongoing by clicking the 'Save As' button.

    Depending upon who originally created the report, there are a couple of options when it comes to saving a report:

    • If you have made adjustments to a report created by someone else, you will have to save the report as a brand new (the 'saved as a new report' checkbox is auto-selected for you) since it's not your original report.

    • If you have made adjustments to a report created by yourself (and the report is in your 'My Reports' section), you can either:

      • Update the existing report by clicking on 'Save As' and then de-selecting the 'Save as a new report' option

      • Save the report as a brand new report by clicking on 'Save As' and then selecting the option of saving the report as a brand new report

    Once you have clicked 'Confirm', the saved report will appear in the 'My Reports' section, which you can access from the main system header, or from the reports list in your reports page. All your saved reports will appear here.

    In addition to all the report personalization options listed above, Team Leaders or people with the 'Can customize reports' permission will also get access to advanced editing options.

    This lets them completely remove and create brand new visuals within a report, rather than just having the ability to modify existing ones, and gives them the ability to create and delete cards with headline level information.

    You can easily discard your changes at any time by reverting back to the previous view of a visual

    You can find out more about the advanced editing options you have from Microsoft's own Power BI documentation, available here:

    You can also share reports with other users by clicking on the 'Share' option and selecting which users you want to share it with.

    The report will then show in the user(s) Shared Reports section.

    You can also copy the Report link URL here too, if you want to share the report via another app.

    Reports that have been shared with you will appear in your Shared Reports list.

    When it comes to deleting reports, there are a few of things to be aware of.

    • You can delete any of your own personalized reports i.e. any of the reports under the 'My Reports' section.

    • You can delete any reports that have been shared with you i.e. any of the reports under the 'Shared Reports' section. Deleting a report that has been shared with you will not delete the report for anyone else.

    • You cannot delete an original standard report. However, if you have personalized a standard report and saved that personalized report (and it therefore appears under the 'My Reports' section), you can delete that personalized report (see above point).

    • Deleting a report that you have shared with another user will delete the 'original' report for you, as well as deleting the shared report for the other user. The report will also no longer be accessible for that user via a saved URL link.

    • Any reports deleted by yourself will still be accessible via a saved URL link.

    Currently, Enate provides three standard, out of the box reports:

    • User's Overview Report

    • User Insights Report

    • Team View Report

    • Sentiment Analysis Report

    Your user role will determine which standard reports you are able to see.

    Overview

    Microsoft's Power BI reporting platform
    Standard, out of the box reports
    create your own personalized reports

    Please note:

    • Dates given to the creation of reports will be according to UTC time zone.

    • When a report has been open for more than an hour, an error may appear within the visuals. Simply refresh your page to see the data again.

    Accessing Reports

    Report Structure Overview

    Personalizing a Report

    Saving a Report

    Advanced Mode

    Sharing a Report

    Note that you will only be able to share reports with someone if they have permission to view all of the data in the report.

    Deleting a Report

    Standard Reports Available

    When an Action moves past To Do, its parent Case moves to In Progress as well if the Case was still sitting in To Do.

    If you've picked up an Action in error, or if your reach the conclusion that it's not a piece of work you're going to be able to progress you can unassign it from yourself, either to another resource or just back to its Queue. This could be after 10 seconds or half an hour, but when you do this the system will automatically set the status back to 'To Do' to let everyone know that it's not going to be progressed until another resource picks it up. You can also just manually set the status back to 'To Do' if for example you started working on it in error and need to quickly undo the status change.

    Similarly if a robot resource rejects a piece of work its status will be set back to 'To Do' as part of handing it over for a human resource to carry out.

    If you're working on an Action and you have to temporarily halt work on it because you're waiting for some additional information or because of some other temporary blocker, you should choose the 'Wait' status.

    When placing an Action into a state of 'Wait', you need to specify the type of wait. Every Action offers:

    • Wait for more information

    • Wait Until

    Two further wait types appear on particular Action types:

    Wait type
    Where it appears

    Wait for Sub Case

    On a 'Wait for Sub Cases to Complete' Action whose Sub Case has not finished yet.

    Wait for External System

    On a 'Trigger External API' Action. Enate also uses this wait type for IDP Document Extraction and AI Analyst Actions while they are being processed.

    If you confirm the Wait status without choosing a wait type, the system responds with 'Please specify a wait type before continuing.'

    An Action may be configured so that when it is paused, the parent Case also pauses. However, it is important to note that the Case will only pause when a user selects the 'Wait for more information' option at run time. If the user selects the 'Wait Until' option, then the parent Case will not pause.

    When that Action comes off Wait, Enate resumes the parent Case to In Progress automatically.

    Impact on SLA clock: IF the Action's due date rule (configured during process design) has 'Add Wait Time To Due Date' set to ON, SLA clock PAUSES while an Action is in this state. If it is set to OFF, the SLA clock CONTINUES while the Action is in this state.

    If you're working on an Action and you have to temporarily halt work on it because you're waiting for some for some information from a third party or client, you should choose 'Wait for more information'.

    Unlike a Ticket, an Action does not ask you for a number of days to wait, and unlike a Case it does not ask you for a wait reason. The Action waits until information arrives.

    Upon confirming the 'Wait for more information' status, the Action will move from your Work Inbox into your Owned Work list, as there is no active work to be carried out on it until a response is received.

    Once a response has been received, the Action will move back from your Owned Work list into your Work Inbox in a state of To Do, highlighted for you to progress.

    On an Approval Action, this wait type also offers a checkbox to send a new approval request email to the approvers.

    Impact on SLA clock: SLA clock CONTINUES while the Action is in this state. 'Add Wait Time To Due Date' has no effect on a 'Wait Until', because Enate only adds wait time back to the due date for a wait for more information.

    If you're working on an Action and you have to temporarily halt work on it until a specific future date/time, you should choose 'Wait Until'.

    When you select 'Wait Until', you must specify the desired follow up date and time.

    The date and time must be in the future and no more than one year ahead. If you leave it blank or choose a date that has passed, the system tells you so and does not save the change. If the follow up date is later than the Action's due date, the system warns you that 'This date is beyond the Due Date. This may result in SLA failure'. It does not stop you.

    Upon confirming the 'Wait Until' status, the Action will move from your Work Inbox into your Owned Work list, as there is no active work to be carried out on it until the follow up date.

    When this date is reached, the Action will move back from your Owned Work list into your Work Inbox in a state of To Do, highlighted for you to progress. The Info Card says so in advance, for example 'Set to wait until 14 Oct 2026 09:00. After this date the Action will move back to To Do.'

    While an Action is waiting, the Info Card offers an 'Edit Wait' button. Use this to change the wait type or the follow up date without first moving the Action to another status.

    You signify completing the Action by marking it as Resolved.

    Along with this there are two options to specify how the Action was resolved:

    • Complete

    • Unable to Complete

    If you try to save without picking one, the system responds with 'Please specify a resolution type before continuing.'

    Where the Action has a checklist, every item must be answered Yes, No or N/A before you can mark the Action as complete. See The Action Screen for more about checklists.

    Set this option if you cannot complete the required activity. Once you have confirmed this option, the Action will be closed and cannot be re-opened. The Case Owner will be notified of this and be asked to take the necessary steps to resolve at Case level. This may involve starting another copy of the Action, reworking the Case from a previous step, or moving on.

    Enter the reason you are unable to complete the Action and hit the 'can't Complete' button to confirm. The tab will close.

    The reason is mandatory and can be at most 256 characters. If you leave it blank the system responds with 'Please specify the reason why this Action cannot be completed before continuing.' If it is too long, it responds with 'Reason for not completing the Action cannot exceed 256 characters.'

    The parent Case is then put into To Do and flagged as needing attention, with a reason of 'Action Unable To Complete'.

    A Manual with Peer Review Action passes through Resolved twice. When the person doing the work resolves it as Complete, the Action does not close. It returns to To Do with the assignee cleared, now waiting for a reviewer.

    At that point the Info Card asks for a peer review outcome rather than a resolution method, and offers:

    Outcome
    What happens next

    Pass

    The Action closes.

    Fail

    The Action goes back to To Do for the work to be done again, with the assignee cleared.

    Unable to Complete

    Fail and Unable to Complete both require a comment. If you leave it blank the system responds with 'Please enter Peer Review Comments before continuing.' The comment then appears on the Action's Info Card as 'Peer Review failed because:'.

    You cannot review your own work. The Action is read only for the person who did it, and for anyone whose Work Manager role does not include the 'Peer review Action Full Access' permission.

    If the Action's peer review rules mean no review is needed this time, Enate skips the review and closes the Action straight away.

    See here for more information:

    After the Action has been resolved, it will move to a state of 'Closed'.

    Actions do not have a feedback window. Resolved is a moment in an Action's life rather than a status it sits in, so an Action moves through Resolved to Closed in the same step.

    Any subsequent mails received will launch a brand new work item. Once you have selected this, the Action will be closed and cannot be re-opened.

    Not every Action is resolved by a person. Enate changes an Action's status by itself in these cases:

    What happens
    Where the Action ends up
    Reason recorded

    A 'Send Email' Action sends its email.

    Closed

    Updated By Enate

    The Action's General Settings flavour has 'Auto-complete on Timeout' switched on, and the Action passes its due date.

    Closed

    Action 10040-C-A1.1, 'HR Approval' on the Case 'Jack Jones new starter', is launched in a status of To Do.

    1. Priya opens it. Enate assigns it to her and moves it to In Progress. The parent Case, which was in To Do, moves to In Progress at the same time.

    2. Priya needs confirmation from the hiring manager, so she selects Waiting, chooses a wait type of 'Wait for more information' and clicks Save Changes. The tab closes. The Action type is configured to pause its parent Case, so the Case moves to Waiting as well, with a wait reason of 'Awaiting Information from Action'.

    3. The hiring manager replies. The Action returns to To Do in Priya's Work Inbox, and the Case resumes to In Progress.

    4. Priya answers the checklist items, selects Resolved and picks 'Complete'. The Action is resolved as 'Done Successfully' and moves straight to Closed. The next Action in the step launches.

    Setting an Action back to 'To Do'

    Using 'Wait' for Actions

    Wait for more information for Actions

    Wait Until for Actions

    Enate checks for waits that have expired every 30 seconds, so an Action comes off Wait shortly after its follow up date and time rather than exactly on it.

    Editing an existing wait

    Resolving an Action

    Unable to Complete

    Peer Review Actions

    Resolved to Closed

    There is no way to reopen a closed Action, and no way to undo an 'Unable to Complete'. If the work still needs doing, the Case Owner has to launch another copy of the Action or rework the Case.

    Note: You can easily move an item from 'To Do' straight through to resolved.

    Actions that move on without you

    Worked example: an HR Approval Action that waits

    'Peer Review' Actions
    If there is a comma in the email display name, anything before the first comma will be used as the contact's last name and anything after the comma but before the space will be used as their first name. For example, if the email display name is 'Smith, John' then the contact's last name will be auto-filled as 'Smith' and their first name will be auto-filled as 'John'.
  • If the system can't auto-fill the first name and last name with confidence, then the contact will be auto-created without a first and last name and the user will be prompted to fill this themselves when they submit the work item.

  • Additionally the company set to an auto-created contact will depend on the contact scope setting in Builder. If it's set to 'Global', or 'Global and Local', the auto-created contact will have a Global scope, i.e. not linked to any specific company. If it is set to 'Local', the auto-created contact will be created under the company that the related Work item exists under.

    You can add contacts from the Contact Management page by clicking on the Create Contact icon and filling out the details for the contact in the resulting popup.

    You can import a list of contacts from an Excel spreadsheet in the Contact Management page. A template is provided and the template is supported in all of the languages that Enate offers.

    If you are searching for a new contact which does not currently exist in the system, you can create a new contact from Quickfind itself. Navigate to the people search function in Quickfind and click on ‘add a contact’.

    When you click on ‘add a contact’, the system will decode and auto-populate the first name, last name and email address. Once you fill in all the information and click on create, you will be taken to the Contact Activity Page of the new contact.

    You can also create a new contact from the contacts card a work item. When you search for a user in the contacts card that does not exist in the system, you can create a new contact by clicking on the ‘Create Contact’ option and filling in the contact's details.

    If you have written the email address for the contact, the system will decode and auto-populate the first name and last name of the contact. Once you fill in all the information and click on create contact, the system will redirect you back to the work item.

    You can see if an external contact has been automatically created by the system or manually created by a user by looking at the 'Auto-Created' column in the Contact Management Page.

    Depending upon how it has been configured in Builder, you will have various options when assigning a company to an external contact:

    • All Companies/Global

      • Setting the company to this means that external contact can create and access work items for all companies.

      • It also means that work manager users are able to search for other all external contacts on a work item.

    • A particular company (local)

      • Setting the contact scope to a particular company means that external contact will only be able to create and access work items for that particular company that the external contact has been associated to.

      • Users will also only be able to add a Contact to a Packet API if the Contact is in the same Company (or is in an umbrella Company).

    To edit a contact, go to the Contact Management page and double click on the contact to bring up the Edit Contact popup.

    You are also able to bulk edit the company, time zone, office location, preferred language and default tag of your contacts by selecting on the contacts' tick boxes - click on the Edit button which will appear to display the Bulk Edit popup. Set details as desired and hit Confirm to save bulk changes.

    To delete a contact, go to the Contact Management page and click on the contact's tick box and the delete button will appear. You are able to delete multiple contacts at once.

    It is important to take your user permissions into account when understanding which Contact records you are able to see, depending on the Global / Local scope setting which has been made in Builder:

    Enate supports the creation of separate Contact records in Test Mode, i.e. any contact records you create in Test mode will be accessible only to Test Mode users (and contacts created in live mode will be accessible only to Live mode users). This helps to ensure that emails from test work items are not accidentally sent to production users, and vice versa.

    Adding Contacts

    1) Automatically from an incoming email

    'Enable Automatic Contact Creation' setting is set to ON in Builder

    2) Adding an individual contact from the Contact Management page

    3) Importing contacts to the Contact Management page from an Excel template

    It is mandatory to fill in the email address when importing Contacts from an Excel template. If you don't specify a company, the contact will automatically be set to global. See here for more information about .

    4) Adding a contact from Quickfind

    Note: The contact email address must be unique in the system.

    5) Adding a contact from the Contacts Card of a Work Item

    Please note that if you create a new contact in test mode, that contact will only be available for running test packets in the system.

    Automatic vs Manual Contact Creation

    Please note that once a contact that auto-created has had edits made to it, it will no longer display as an auto-created contact in the 'Auto Created' column of the Contact Management Page.

    Company Name - External Contact Scoping

    Please note that this setting is only available if the External Contact Scope has been set to 'Global' or 'Global and Local' in Builder. See for more information.

    Please note:

    1. It is only possible to change the associated company of an external contact from All Companies/Global to a particular company (local) if the external contact is not associated with work items from multiple different companies. You can change this by reassigning the Contact on a work item.

    2. To scope external contacts to Global/All Companies the Company column in Bulk Upload file should be left blank so by default the contacts will be scoped to Global.

    Impact of Global / Local Scoping on linking Contacts to a Work Item

    Please note that if an External Contact is scoped locally (i.e. is linked a specific Company), you cannot add them as a contact for a work item which exists within another company. This is also true for User accounts (which must always exist under a specific Company). ONLY Globally scoped External accounts have the flexibility to be linked as contacts to work items in any Customer.

    Editing a Contact

    Deleting a Contact

    Contact Scope vs. Permissions

    Please note: - Locally-scoped contacts are visible to you in if you have permissions specificallly on that contact's company, or parent companies. If you don't have such permissions, you will not be able to see the contact record. - Global contacts are visible to all users.

    Creating Contacts in Test Mode

    Warning - Do Not Use Production Email Addresses when creating Test Contacts

    IMPORTANT: Do NOT create Test Contact records using information (specifically email address) for people you will be using in normal production. If you create a Contact record while you are in Test mode this will be created as a Test Contact, and ALL emails arriving into the system from that email address will create a Case/Ticket in Test Mode. This would result in incoming production emails creating work test work items which would not be visible by production users.

    If you have created a production Contact record as a Test Contract record in error, you should edit the Test contact by changing the email address, then switch back to normal production mode to create the desired normal Contact record.

    Please note that when upgrading from versions older than 2022.3, the files attached directly to a work item will all show in the 'Other work items' section without a reference number. Email attachments for this work item's emails will show in the 'Current' section however.

    Adding Files/Links to a Work Item

    Note: The maximum size per file is 100.00 MB.

    File Type restrictions

    Tagging Files and Links

    Note: If file tags are not configured in your system then this ‘add file tag’ option will not be displayed.

    Adding Notes to Files

    Previewing Files

    If the file is not previewable, a confirmation banner will pop up to explain this, and to offer an option to download the file. The file types supported for preview are as follows: txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, jpe, jif, jfif, jfi, png, gif, web, tiff, tif, heif,heic, svg, svgz.

    Downloading Files

    Deleting Files/Links

    Filtering Files/Links

    Freetext File Search

    add as attachments to any outgoing emails
    general settings
    set in Builder
    Marketplace
    canned response
    email templates

    Searching for People

    Note: You will only be able to see the email addresses and the Contacts belonging to the companies that you have access to. These settings are configured in Builder, click here for more information.

    Creating a new Contact Record from Quickfind

    Note: The contact email address must be unique in the system.

    Searching for Communications

    Searching Files

    Note: You will only be able to see the files and work items that you have access to to based on the permissions you have. These settings are configured in Builder, click here for more information. You will also not be able to search for files or communication attachments that have been deleted.

    Additionally, to mitigate performance issues Quickfind will not return search results for:

    • Communication attachments that start with 'Mime Attachment'

    • Communication attachments that start with 'MIME-Attachment'

    You can still search for the text mime attachment, but the only results will be from work item files. You can still search for 'mim' which may return other results.

    Also note that the system uses 'start with' logic for searching for files where it adds a wildcard to the END of search texts. This means that if you are searching for a file called 'Invoice Processing.docx', searches for 'processing' would not find the file, but searches for 'invoice' would.

    Contact Activity page
    Contact Activity Page

    Time Tracking

    To help you manage activity against your SLAs, Enate allows users to track the time it takes for work items to be completed, both as an overall total and broken out by the various resources who may have worked on it.

    The time tracker records the time of each individual browser session that the item is worked on; time is tracked whenever a work item is open on-screen, regardless of whether it is assigned to the user or not and regardless of what state the work item is in. The time tracker runs for one single work item at a time within a browser session and will run for a work item tab when it gets browser tab focus. It continues to run even if the browser is minimized, if the computer is in lock screen etc.

    In the scenario where work item A is open (with the timer running) and a further work item B tab gets opened, the timer will stop on item A and switch instead to item B. Flipping between these work item tabs would equally switch which one the time tracker is running for.

    Time tracking halts when the work item tab is closed and in the event of a browser/machine timing out.

    See here for more details about in the Time Tracker card.

    Composing Emails

    You can write a new email from the Email tab of a work item.

    You can , and send an email straight away.

    Note that you cannot send an email that .

    Once the email has been sent, it will appear in the timeline, where you can see who composed the email, the content of the email if you expand it, when the email was composed and when it was sent. You will also have the option to reply to the email, forward the email, expand the email or print the email.

    To help safeguard sensitive information, should a recipients address that is not associated with a Work Item ever be entered in an email in a Work Item, a warning message will appear alerting you to the fact that an email address is not associated with the work item and giving you the option to remove any non-associated email addresses. If you still wish to send the email to the chosen email recipient simply click send.

    If the ‘Record Count’ gets updated, the ‘Estimated Effort’ for any running Sub Case Actions that have not been updated by a Work Manager user will be updated to reflect the change in record count.
  • Increasing this value will decrease the ‘Work Not Yet Created’ Sub Case estimate and vice versa and therefore might affect the total 'Sub Case Estimated' effort

  • Once an Action is in a state of Resolved or Closed, its estimated effort can no longer be changed.

  • ‘Actual’ effort shows the amount of time that has so far been spent working on that Sub Case Action

    • The value is taken from the Time Tracker of the Sub Case Action.

  • ‘Estimated Remaining’ shows the amount of time estimated to be left on the Sub Case Action.

    • It is calculated by subtracting the 'Actual' effort for the Sub Case Action from the 'Estimated' effort.

  • The due date of the Sub Case Action

    • You'll also see a 'Start By' value if the 'Actual' effort is currently zero. This value show when is the absolute latest that the Sub Case Action can be started by in order to meet its due date.

  • The status of the Sub Case Action

  • If there is isn't enough time in the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' of the parent Case, this 1 hour increase will result in an increase in the the 'Estimated' effort for the whole parent Case.

  • Example 2: let's say that a Sub Case only has one Action created for it called Sub Case Action 1. The 'Estimated' effort for Sub Case Action 1 is 2 hours and the estimated 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' for the Sub Case is 1 hour, therefore the 'Estimated' effort for the overall Sub Case is 3 hours. A user decides that Sub Case Action 1 is going to take 2 more hours and so updated the 'Estimated' effort for Sub Case Action 1 from 2 to 4 hours, causing the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' for the Sub Case to decrease as much as it can - here it will decrease by 1 hour to from 1 to 0. The "remaining" 1 hour will effectively be added to the total 'Estimated' effort of the Sub Case that will increase by 1 hour from 3 to 4 hours.

    • If there is enough time in the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' of the parent Case, this 1 hour increase might be taken from there, therefore there will be no impact on the 'Estimated' effort for the whole parent Case.

    • If there is isn't enough time in the 'Effort for Work Not Yet Created' of the parent Case, this 1 hour increase will result in an increase in the the 'Estimated' effort for the whole parent Case.

  • Initial Estimated Effort Per Record
    record count
    Initial Estimated Effort Per Record
    record count
    Information regarding closed work items will only be shown for the past year. Open/running work items will show information spanning the entirety of its processing time, even if it has been longer than one year.
  • Currently the moment reports are only available in English.

  • Additionally, report data is not updated in real-time, and will be updated on regular scheduled intervals (last updated time stamp is shown on a report).

  • The company set to an auto-created contact will depend on the contact scope setting you have set. If it's set to 'Global', or 'Global and Local', the auto-created contact will have a Global scope, i.e. not linked to any specific company. If it is set to 'Local', the auto-created contact will be created under the company that the related Work item exists under.

    company scoping
    here
    The card displays the length of time of the current session, a combined total of the length of time of all previous sessions, the expected initial estimated effort time and - for Actions and Tickets - the estimated effort time which the user can alter, which is useful for Forecasting.

    Additionally you can edit the time of the current and your previous recorded sessions, regardless of whether or not you are the work item's assignee. However please note that only Team Leaders are able to edit the time recorded by other members of their team, whereas Team Members are only able to edit the time recorded for their own sessions.

    Expanding the Time Tracker card displays the recorded time for previous sessions, as well as who was working on the work item during that session, how long the session lasted and if the session's recorded time has been edited.

    Clicking on the information icon lets you see the date and time when the session was recorded and, if the work item is a Ticket, which category it was assigned to during that session.

    You can edit the time of the current and previous recorded sessions, regardless of whether or not you are the work item's assignee. However please note that only Team Leaders are able to edit the time recorded by other members of their team, whereas Team Members are only able to edit the time recorded for their own sessions.

    Manually editing the current time-on-task will save that edited time as a new row in the history.

    You will be able to see further information including when an edit was made and who by when you open the card in full-screen mode.

    You can click the expand icon to open the card in full-screen mode. Here you can see the length of time of the current session, a combined total of the length of time of all previous sessions, and, for Actions and Tickets, the expected time required to complete the work item. You will also be able to see more detailed information about the individual session, as well as information about edits made to the recorded time:

    Column
    Detail

    User

    Who was working on the work item

    Time

    The start and end time and total length of time of the recorded session

    The expected time required to complete the work item can be configured in Builder for Cases, Actions and Tickets. Note that this information will only display if:

    • An Initial Estimated Effort value has been entered for this Case, Action or the selected Ticket Category in Builder.

    • The system-wide settings 'Show Time Tracker' and 'Display Expected Time in Time Tracker' are enabled.


    • If you only have one work item open in Enate and are currently working on a different business application, as long as you return to that tab before your Enate session expires your time will be tracked accurately.

    • If you have multiple work items open in Enate and are currently working on a different business application, as long as you return to the most recently accessed tab before your Enate session expires your time will be tracked accurately. The other work items that were open but not accessed mostly recently will not have their times tracked.

    In order to keep time tracking of your activities as accurate as possible, here are a few help 'Do's and Don'ts' that will optimise how the system can help while running in a web browser.

    Remember that you might have one single Enate Work item tab open, or perhaps multiple work items open in tabs in your browser.

    1. Always open the work item you want to track time against as the LAST activity in Enate before switching to another business application to work on your task.

    2. Make sure to return to the Enate application at the point where you finish your task.

    3. If your activity is taking an extended period of time to complete, it's a good idea to come back to Enate from time to time, since your session may otherwise time out due to your browser timeout*.

    *Session timeout periods for browsers could be typically from 20 mins to several hours. If you're finding that that things are timing out like this, speak with your IT admin about how that settings can be extended to help avoid this.

    1. Failing to return to Enate after finishing your work.

    2. Returning to Enate too late, i.e. after a session timeout due to inactivity.

    3. Logging in on a different device or browser rather than going back to the same tab you left.

    4. Just clicking the 'X' on the Enate tab without having reopened it (i.e. without having clicked to display the tab content).

    5. Restarting the browser before returning to the Enate tab.

    6. Closing the entire browser.

    7. Restarting your system.


    Time is tracked whenever a user has the Enate work item tab open either displayed or not displayed on screen. Time will not be tracked when the Time Tracker Card has been paused. You can find more detailed information about whether time is tracked or not in a particular scenario from the table below.

    Tab Situation
    Scenario
    Running Counter Behaviour

    One Enate work item tab open

    Users performs work away from Enate, then returns to Enate before the session timeout

    Time is tracked on the work item accurately. Most correct user behaviour.

    Multiple work item tabs open

    • The Enate system will always keep a record of the automatically recorded time (i.e. not manually edited). This is a record of the amount of time which the work item tab was displayed directly on screen. This data is not displayed to you but can be accessed for MI / reporting purposes. Please note that the time tracker tracks ALL accessing of the work item, even after it is completed.

    • Manually editing the current time-on-task will save that edited time as a new row in the history. The ‘time on task’ box will subsequently display the auto-running count of the time since you started the manual edit of the previously displayed value.

    Overview

    When is time tracked for a Work Item?

    Switching between tabs

    Work Item Time Tracking when accessing Email View

    Clicking directly on an email in any of the Email View tabs will start the time tracker running for that work item and would stop a time tracker running for any other work item tab it had been running on immediately prior to this.

    Time Tracker Card Information

    when time is tracked or not tracked

    Note: You are able to pause and reset the time being recorded for the current session, regardless of whether or not you are the work item's assignee.

    Viewing Previous Recorded Sessions

    Editing Recorded Times

    Note that time tracker values for work performed by robots are read-only.

    Viewing Edited Times

    'Expected Time'

    Ensuring Accurate Auto-Time Tracking - Recommendations

    Helpful Hints and Tips (Dos and Don'ts)

    Recommended behaviour (Dos)

    Things that may lead to less accurate tracking (Don'ts)

    Details - Time Tracking in various scenarios

    Additional Time Tracking Information

    You can also reply / forward emails from the timeline by clicking on the links available. These buttons will be enabled when you mouse over the email card.

    System behaviour for entering email addresses is as follows:

    • When sending a new email, the system will default the To address to that of the Primary Contact in the contacts section. Cc Address will also default to email addresses entered in the Ccs section.

    • If more than one possible From email address is configured, the system will populate the default one (configured as default in Builder), and will display a dropdown to allow the alternate ones to be selected.

    • These standard rules for default and suggested addresses can be overridden for To, Cc and Bcc for Cases and Actions in Builder configuration. Addresses set as default will auto-populate (more than one can be set in this way). Override addresses not set as default will be available for quick selection by clicking the To / Cc/ Bcc button address

    • When searching for a contact in the To/CC/BCC fields, you will only be able to view contacts from the same company as the work item. However, you can manually enter the email address of a contact from a different company.

    When composing emails, you can easily copy email addresses between the To/Cc/Bcc addresses via the ‘copy’ icon displayed when clicking into the relevant address field.

    When you send out an email which contains new email addresses (i.e. not linked to existing contacts), the system will display a popup to allow you to create them as new contact records.

    If there are any email addresses for which you do not wish to create a new record, simply hover over the row and click the delete icon. Additionally, there is a ‘Do not show this again’ checkbox which when clicked will ensure you are not presented with this popup for subsequent new email addresses (this can be switched back on again in the user profile section where you can also find your email signature settings).

    Via the email toolbar you can:

    • Attach files to the email

    • Access the email body formatting toolbar

    • Pin the email body formatting toolbar

    • Insert a Canned Text

    • Set the email importance as high

    Clicking on the email body formatting icon will formatting options for the main body of the email.

    You also have the option to pin the email body formatting toolbar.

    The email body formatting toolbar gives you the options to:

    • Select the font

    • Select the font size

    • Make the text Bold, Italic or Underlined

    • Undo your previous changes (also available with Ctrl + Z)

    • Redo your previous changes (also available with Ctrl + Shift + Z)

    • Expand the email to full screen

    • Select the background colour

    • Select the text colour

    • Choose how to align the text

    • Add a numbered list

    • Add a bullet list

    • Text inline options - ability to increase or decrease the text indent

    • Insert a horizontal line

    • Adjust the line height

    • Select an inline style

    • Format the cell style

    • Insert a strike through (also available by highlighting the text and Ctrl + S)

    • Add a subscript or superscript

    • Add special characters

    • Insert a link

    • Insert a table

    • Insert an image

    • You also have the option to view a list of keyboard shortcuts

    When you compose an email (either as an email template in Builder, or any form of new/response/forward email in Work Items in Work Manager) your font settings (i.e. your font style and size) the font type and font size most recently used will be saved as the font for writing content so you don't need to set them again.

    These values are saved to the user profile so will persist between Builder and Work Manager usage.

    This only pertains to the front at the very top of the email being composed - if user clicks into any pre-existing content further down the mail, the font style and size already in use for that content will be used. See note for further details. As part of this change, inconsistencies in 'new empty lines' for emails has been resolved - when writing a new email, 2 blank lines will always be inserted that the top of the mail.

    Note that the font for canned texts and templates will use the font settings when they were created.

    The email font style and size being used when a user is composing a mail will depending on whether they are clicking on pre-existing content. The logic for which fonts will be used is as follows, and is impacted by the new auto-insertion of two blank lines at the beginning of every new email:

    • 1st auto-inserted line: uses the user-saved font settings from their most - recent email.

    • 2nd auto-inserted. This is always set as Arial - 10.

    Subsequent email content after this may come from: -previous emails in the mail chain

    • email template content

    • email signature content font style and size in these sections will come from that already existing content, depending on where user clicks.

    You can copy/paste information into emails from external documents, e.g. Excel tables and Word document content, as well as HTML information from webpages.

    If you wish to dedicate more screen space to view emails, you can use the available pop out feature:

    The Undo Send setting lets you add a time delay to when your emails will be sent, giving you the opportunity to cancel sending an email, or reviewing an email before it gets sent.

    You can set an Undo Send time in User Settings.

    When an Undo Send time is set, a popup will appear allowing you to cancel sending the email.

    Additionally, when an Undo Send time is set, you will have the option of sending an email 'Now' in the Timeline which overrides the time delay from the Undo Send configuration and you will also have the option to cancel sending the email altogether.

    When an Undo Send time is set, emails will be shown in the Outbox page with a Send Status of Queue.

    For all type of emails (inbound / outbound / cancelled / failed/ scheduled) you have the option to download the underlying .eml file. This is available from the various locations in the system where emails can be see, i.e. Work Item Comms & Timeline sections, Email Inbox, Sent Items views.

    You can easily check the spelling & grammar for everything you write in Enate (including your emails) by switching on spellchecker in your browser. For information on how to enable spell checker in the most popular internet browsers follow this link "How to enable spell check in Enate".

    You can write a brand new email without needing to have the work item assigned to you.

    Sending an email to a recipient not associated with a Work Item

    Responding to emails from the timeline

    save an email as a draft
    schedule when you want to send an email
    exceeds the size set in Builder

    Rules for To, From, Cc, Bcc Addresses

    Note: The From address always displays in the email composition section when you are writing an email. This ensures that the sender will always have a view of the email address being used as the from when sending out emails from a particular work item.

    Note: You will only be able to see the email addresses of contacts from companies that you have access to. However, you are able to manually enter any email address. These permissions can be configured in Builder, click for more information.

    Copy-paste of Email Addresses between To, Cc, Bcc

    External Contacts creation prompt for new email addresses

    Email toolbar

    Email Body Formatting Toolbar

    Font Settings Saved

    Copy / Paste of Excel, Word and Web information

    Email Pop out

    Undo Send Setting

    Downloading an email

    Please note: If the email you are attempting to download contains an attachment file which has been explicitly manually deleted by an user (for e.g. reasons of data sensitivity), the .eml download option will be disabled for that email - the system will display a message explaining the reason for this disabling when download icon is clicked.

    How do I enable spell checker in Enate

    The Action closes as not done successfully.

    Timeout

    A 'Trigger External API' Action gets no response in time, or the external system reports a failure.

    To Do, so a person can pick it up

    Timeout

    The Case is cancelled, or the Case flow reaches an End Case Action.

    Closed

    Cancelled, or End Case

    Email Sentiment Report

    The Email Sentiment report displays information relating to email sentiment analysis allowing users to quickly and clearly see developing trends regarding incoming emails and take action where necessary.

    How does the Email Sentiment Report work

    In order for the Email Sentiment report to be available, the EnateAI Sentiment Analysis integration must be enabled (this can be done in Enate's Marketplace in Builder). When this integration runs it generates the data needed for the report. Once this integration has been activated, information will automatically begin to be sent into and displayed in the report.

    Accessing the Email Sentiment Report

    Access to and the ability to edit the sentiment report is controlled by permissions in user roles, in the same way as all other reports within Enate. If users do not have the right permissions enabled, they will not be able to access the report. To edit the report users will need the 'Create Custom Reports' permission enabled.

    Email Sentiment Report Default Structure

    Email Share by Sentiment Type

    The positive and negative smileys are interactive, i.e. clicking on them will filter the page content accordingly. This updated display replaces the previous pie chart style display showing sentiment share.

    Impact Zones

    This chart will replace the old chart - Email sentiments by Work Item SLA''. The legends of the new chart are as follows:

    • High Priority Zone: SLA Not Met + Negative Sentiment.

    • Success Optimization Zone: SLA Met + Negative Sentiment.

    • Positive Zones: SLA Met + Positive Sentiment.

    • Neutral Zones: SLA Met or SLA Not Met + Neutral Sentiment.

    Hovering over the chart will show the options where a Question Mark will appear. Hovering over the question mark will show the tooltip which explains the zones, to help users better understand each section.

    Sentiment Zones Explained:

    • High Priority Zones: Negative sentiment + SLA missed – needs urgent attention.

    • Success Optimization Zones: Negative sentiment + SLA met – SLA OK, but experience needs work.

    • Neutral / Positive Zone: Feedback aligns with sentiment – either neutral or positive.

    We are adding a new chart into the report: 'Email Sentiment By Ticket Categories'. As the name suggests, this shows the email sentiments by ticket categories, with concatenated levels i.e. “Level 1 > Level 2 > Level 3”.

    A new line chart is being introduced into the report: 'Email Sentiments By Number of Times Work Item Reopened'. This will have the email sentiment count categorized by the number of times work items were reopened. The grouping 'buckets' are: 1-3 Times, 3-5 Times, 5-7 Times, 7+ Times. This will help with assessment on the relationship between client feedback ratings and the number of times a work item was reopened.

    This chart now has a sentiment selector drop-down where users can select which sentiment to display on the chart. By default it will have Positive and Negative sentiment selected.

    See below for a complete list of all the available data fields that can be used within the Email Sentiment report:

    Table
    Fields
    Description

    Creating New Linked Work Items

    Overview

    Launching a Case or Ticket from within an existing one creates a 'Linked' relationship between the work items.

    Work items with a 'linked' relationship will retain a link to the original Case / Ticket but are completely independent, behaving according to their own specific configuration and not needing to wait for the other to complete before they can complete themselves. This is useful when the original Case/Ticket's due date is not dependent on some sub part being completed (e.g. by a different department).

    Linked work items will show on a Linked Work tab in the work item screen, making it easy to track a group of work items which relate to each other.

    Note that only Cases and Tickets can be 'linked' and when a work item is linked to another work item and it is subsequently merged, split or converted into a Case, the subsequent work items resulting from this will also be linked to the original work item.

    For example:

    • When a Ticket is linked to another work item and that Ticket is merged in with another work the remaining merged item will be linked to the original work item.

    • When a Ticket is linked to another work item and that Ticket is split into multiple Tickets, the subsequent child Tickets will also be linked to the original work item.

    • When a Ticket is linked to another work item and that Ticket is later converted into a Case, the subsequent Case will also be linked to the original work item.

    To create a new linked Ticket from an existing Case or Ticket, click the ‘+ Work item’ link shown near the tabs section of the work item and the choose the 'Ticket' option from the dropdown.

    In the resulting pop up, you can filter to search for the new type of Ticket process you want to create in two ways:

    • by searching by email route - you can specify the mailbox address which people would normally send emails into to create work items. Often an email mailbox represent a certain part of the business within which you want to create your new work item. As a useful shortcut we've added a feature here where you can search by mailbox and narrow down straight away the Ticket processes that you can choose from. Selecting a mailbox will filter the dropdown options to only the processes linked to that mailbox.

    • by selecting a Customer, Contract, Service and a Ticket process to launch (these will default in values if there is only one option to choose).

    You can then adjust the following settings for the Ticket:

    Setting
    Detail

    Then click to Create. A link to the new linked Ticket will appear in the .

    Linked Cases will retain a link to the original Case / Ticket but are completely independent, behaving according to their own specific configuration and not needing to wait for the other to complete before they can complete themselves. This is useful when the original Case/Ticket's due date is not dependent on some sub part being completed (e.g. by a different department).

    To create a new linked Case from an existing Case or Ticket, click the ‘+ Work item’ link shown near the tabs section of the work item and the choose the 'Case' option from the dropdown.

    In the resulting pop up, you can filter to search for the new type of Case process you want to create in two ways:

    • by searching by email route - you can specify the mailbox address which people would normally send emails into to create work items. Often an email mailbox represent a certain part of the business within which you want to create your new work item. As a useful shortcut we've added a feature here where you can search by mailbox and narrow down straight away the Case processes that you can choose from. Selecting a mailbox will filter the dropdown options to only the processes linked to that mailbox.

    • by selecting a Customer, Contract, Service and a Case process to launch (these will default in values if there is only one option to choose).

    You can then adjust the following settings for the Case:

    Setting
    Detail

    Then click to Create. A link to the new linked Case will appear in the .

    Bulk Create Work Items

    The Bulk Create feature lets you create large numbers of Cases and/or Tickets via the uploading of data from Excel spreadsheets.

    You can find a link to the Bulk Create page in the ‘Bulk Create’ link in the ‘Create New Work Item’ dropdown.

    This will bring up the Bulk Create screen in a new tab. From this screen select whether you want to bulk create Cases or Tickets. You can then download the relevant Excel template, populate it, then upload it to the page - making sure to fill in any beforehand.

    You can download a template of the excel file. The excel templates available will conform to whichever language you currently have set in your Enate user preferences.

    Once you have added the data into the excel file, save and close it, then on the Bulk Create screen click to select the file.

    You can then choose if you want to allow work items with duplicate titles to be created by using the ‘Unique Title’ option. Leaving this option off allows work items with duplicate titles to be created. Switching this option on will ensure that any work item which is due to have the same title as another item in the upload file will

    Customer

    Name of the Customer

    Context

    Service

    Name of the Service

    Context

    Supplier

    Name of the Supplier

    Date

    Date

    Calendar range of dates for filtering data

    Date

    Month

    Months of the dates

    Date

    Year

    Year of the dates

    Feedback

    Comments

    Feedback comments given on each workitem

    Feedback

    Logged

    Feedback logged date in date time format

    Feedback

    LoggedDate

    Feedback logged date in date format

    Feedback

    Rating

    Feedback rating from 1 - 5

    Feedback

    6M Moving Avg(Ratings)

    6 months moving average over the number of ratings. To be visualised against dates.

    Feedback

    Avg. Rating

    Average ratings given across all workitems

    Feedback

    Total Ratings

    Total number of ratings given

    Feedback Types

    Feedback Type

    Ratings grouped as Happy, Unhappy & Neutral

    Process

    Process

    Name of the process each Work Item belongs to

    Process

    Process Group

    Process group given for Cases / Tickets

    Process

    Work Item Type

    Type of the Work Item (Ticket, Action or Case)

    Sentiment Scores

    Logged

    Email logged date in date time format

    Sentiment Scores

    LoggedDate

    Email logged date in date format

    Sentiment Scores

    Sender

    Email sender's full name or email address (depending on whichever is availible)

    Sentiment Scores

    Sentiment Confidence

    Confidence level of the email classification (or sentiment score) in percentage (0 - 100%)

    Sentiment Scores

    6M Moving Avg

    6 months moving average over the number of emails that have sentiment scores. To be visualised against dates.

    Sentiment Scores

    Email Count

    Total number of emails that sentiment score

    Sentiment Scores

    Work Item Count

    Total number of workitems with emails that have sentiment score

    Sentiment Types

    Sentiment Type

    Types of sentiment (Positve, Negative or Neutral)

    Ticket Categories

    Ticket Category1

    Ticket Category level 1

    Ticket Categories

    Ticket Category2

    Ticket Category level 2

    Ticket Categories

    Ticket Category3

    Ticket Category level 3

    Users

    User Name

    Full name of the user responsible for the work item

    Users

    Email Address

    Email address of the user responsible for the work item

    Users

    Team Manager

    Full name of the manager of the users responsible for the work item

    Work Items

    Assigned User Count Groups

    Grouping of Assigned User Count into different buckets (e.g., 0, 1-3, 3-5, 5-7 etc.). Assigned User Count is the unique number of users assigned to the work item througout it's lifecycle (from start to end).

    Work Items

    Customer Duration(Hrs)

    Total time (in working hours) taken to complete the work item as per the customer calendar. Value will be blank if the work item is still in progress.

    Work Items

    Customer Duration Groups

    Grouping of Customer Durations into different buckets (e.g., 0-24, 24-48, 48-72, 5-7 etc.)

    Work Items

    DueDate

    Work Item Due Date in date time format

    Work Items

    EndDate

    Work Item End Date in date time format

    Work Items

    Has Defects

    Whether the Work Item has defect or not (Yes or No)

    Work Items

    Is Reopened

    Tickets that got opened after going to resolved status

    Work Items

    Reference

    Reference number of each Work Item

    Work Items

    ResolvedDate

    Work Items Resolved Date in date time format

    Work Items

    SLA

    Service Level Agreement to indicate where Work Item is Overdue or not

    Work Items

    StartDate

    Work Item Start Date in date time format

    Work Items

    Title

    Title of the Work Item

    Work Items

    Supplier Duration(Hrs)

    Total time (in working hours) taken to complete the work item as per the supplier calendar. Value will be blank if the work item is still in progress.

    Context

    Contract

    Name of the Contract

    Email Sentiment By Ticket Categories

    Email Sentiments By Number of Times Work Item Reopened

    Email Sentiment Comparison By Context

    Available Data Fields for Sentiment Analysis

    Context

    Category & Sub Categories

    You need to select the category & sub categories of the new Ticket

    Override Due Date

    If your system has been configured this way (), you can select to override the due date of the new Ticket you are creating.

    Copy Defects

    You can copy existing defects from the original Case/Ticket to the new Ticket you are creating. Note that making updates to the Defects in the new linked Ticket will NOT update the defects in the original Ticket/Case it was created from.

    Copy Files

    You can copy existing files that you have uploaded (including tags & file notes) from the original Case/Ticket to the new Ticket you are creating by selecting the Files option. Please Note: For Files that have been received via communications i.e emails, you will need to select Communications in the options in order to copy these files over. Note that making updates to the files in the new linked Ticket will NOT update the files in the original Ticket/Case it was created from.

    Copy Links

    You can copy existing links (including tags & link notes) from the original Case/Ticket to the new Ticket you are creating. Note that making updates to the links in the new linked Ticket will NOT update the links in the original Ticket/Case it was created from.

    Copy Custom Data

    You can copy existing custom data (e.g. custom data fields) from the original Case/Ticket to the new Ticket you are creating. Note that making updates to the custom data in the new linked Ticket will NOT update the custom data in the original Ticket/Case it was created from.

    Copy Communications

    You can copy work item communications i.e. emails (this will include all email attachments i.e files) and notes from the original Case/Ticket to the new linked Ticket you are creating. Note that when choosing to copy communications, you will not only copy communications from the original work item, but you will also copy communications from the original work item's related group, e.g. its Actions if it was a Case, or the parent/child Ticket if it was from a split Ticket. Also note that making updates to the communications in the new linked Ticket will NOT update the communications in the original Ticket/Case it was created from. You can find out more about related groups vs linked work items .

    Send Automated Emails

    You can choose to send auto-generated system emails (e.g. Ticket creation acknowledgement emails) to contacts tagged as the the primary contact, requester or subject.

    Adding Contacts

    You can choose to add a contact. If have been configured to allow you to do so, you can even choose to add multiple different contacts for the new Ticket and divide the tags between them.

    Select All

    You can chose to select all options that have been outlined above.

    Override Due Date

    If your system has been configured this way (), you can select to override the due date of the new Case you are creating.

    Copy Defects

    You can copy existing defects from the original Case/Ticket to the new Case you are creating. Note that making updates to the defects in the new linked Case will NOT update the defects in the original Ticket/Case it was created from.

    Copy Files

    You can copy existing files (including tags and file notes) from the original Case/Ticket to the new Case you are creating. Note that making updates to the files in the new linked Case will NOT update the files in the original Ticket/Case it was created from.

    Copy Links

    You can copy existing links (including tags and link notes) from the original Case/Ticket to the new Case you are creating. Note that making updates to the links in the new linked Case will NOT update the links in the original Ticket/Case it was created from.

    Copy Custom Data

    You can copy existing custom data (e.g. custom data fields) from the original Case/Ticket with the new Case you are creating. Note that making updates to the custom data in the new linked Case will NOT update the custom data in the original Ticket/Case it was created from.

    Copy Communications

    You can copy work item communications i.e. emails (including email attachments) and notes from the original Case/Ticket to the new linked Case you are creating. Note that when choosing to copy communications, you will not only copy communications from the original work item, but you will also copy communications from the original work item's related group, e.g. its Actions if it was a Case, or the parent/child Ticket if it was from a split Ticket. Also note that making updates to the communications in the new linked Case will NOT update the communications in the original Ticket/Case it was created from. You can find out more about related groups vs linked work items .

    Send Automated Emails

    You can choose if you want to send auto-generated system emails (e.g. Case creation acknowledgement emails) to contacts tagged as the the primary contact, requester or subject.

    Adding Contacts

    Unless the '' option in the Case type in the Service Line screen has been selected, it is optional for you to add a contact. You can even choose to add multiple different contacts and divide the tags between.

    Title

    You can modify the title of the new Ticket you are creating

    Short Description

    You can modify the description of the new Ticket you are creating

    Short Description

    You can modify the short description of the new Case you are creating

    Schedule

    If your system has been configured this way (see here for more information), you must select a schedule for the new Case you are creating.

    Creating a new linked Ticket

    Please note that the Tickets available for you to launch will depend on the permissions settings in Builder. Additionally, you will also only be able to select a Ticket process from an email route that has been enabled in Builder (see here for more information). You will also only be able to select a Ticket process in Test Mode if the email route for that Ticket process has been configured to run in Test Mode.

    If you wish to copy files that are attached to communications i.e emails, you will need to select the Communications option.

    Creating a new linked Case

    Please note that the Cases available for you to launch will depend on the permissions settings in Builder. Additionally, you will also only be able to select a Case process from an email route that has been enabled in Builder (see here for more information). You will also only be able to select a Case process in Test Mode if the email route for that Case process has been configured to run in Test Mode.

    'Linked Work' tab
    'Linked Work' tab
    .

    Once you are happy, click on the ‘Upload’ button. This will upload your information about the Cases or Tickets from your file on-screen.

    You will see the following information:

    • Total – the total number of items contained in the uploaded file that will be created

    • Created – the number of items that have been created successfully (this will be zero before you start to create)

    • Issues – the number of items with validation issues (these need to be fixed before the items can be successfully created)

    • Not Started – the number of items that are waiting to be created

    Additionally, in the grid you will see that a 'Status' and 'Reference' column have been added - these will be filled in by the system when the items get created.

    All you need to for now is to click ‘Create Items’ and the system will start creating your Cases/Tickets. The information displayed will update to show the number of items that have been successfully create and the reference numbers of the work items created.

    If you are using version 2022.5 or above of Enate, please use the in-product templates from the bulk create page. If you are using version 2022.4 or below of Enate, please use the templates below

    You can download the excel file templates to bulk create Tickets from the following links:

    You can download the excel file templates to bulk create Cases from the following links:

    The mandatory fields which must be filled in order to create a Case are:

    • Customer

    • Contract

    • Service

    • Case - the process name

    • Title - the title for the individual Case work item.

    The mandatory fields which must be filled in order to create a Ticket are:

    • Customer

    • Contract

    • Service

    • Ticket - the process name

    • Title - the title for the individual Ticket

    • Ticket Description

    • Ticket Category Level 1

    • Ticket Category Level 2

    • Ticket Category Level 3

    • Primary contact - the main contact you are dealing with for this query. .

    • Requester - the contact that raised the initial request. .

    Any contact records used in a bulk create file i.e. Primary Contact, Requester, Subject and CC contacts must adhere to the following rules:

    • the email address of the contact must be used

    • the contact must already exist in the system

    • the contact must be scoped to the same customer that the Case/Ticket will be created under

    Optional fields that can be filled in for both Tickets and Cases are:

    • Subject - the contact the work item is about. See section about contact record requirements.

    • CC email address(es) - any further contacts which can be copied on any correspondence. See section about contact record requirements. Also note that when adding two or more CC email addresses, please make sure to separate the addresses with a semi colon (;) with no spaces either side e.g. user.one@example.net;user.two@example.net.

    • Override Due Date - enter the new due date. See date formatting section.

    • Do Not Send Automated Emails To Contacts - whether or not you want to send system-automated emails, such as request acknowledgement emails, to the contacts of the work item. Enter 'True' or 'False', this also applies for languages other than English.

    Please be aware that any dates entered must have the following formatting:

    DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM

    Note that hours and minutes entered can either be in the 24 hour system format i.e. 23:00 or in the 12 hour system format with an AM/PM after it i.e. 11:00 AM.

    Valid date format examples:

    • 25-05-2022 23:25

    • 25-05-2022 11:25 PM

    If you choose not to enter hours or minutes, the system will set a default time of 00:00.

    You can also pass custom data fields into the Cases/Tickets as they are being created. To do this, add a column name which precisely matches the data field name in Enate. If any of these bespoke fields are marked as mandatory in your Case process configuration, you MUST supply a value in this field’s column for every row in the upload file (otherwise that row will fail validation and a Case will not be created for it).

    Bulk create supports below list of custom field type:

    1. Check Box

    2. Date Only - see date formatting section.

    3. Date and Time - see date formatting section.

    4. Decimal Number

    5. Email Address

    6. Hyperlink - note that hyperlinks with customised display text are not supported i.e. the text entered in a hyperlink field must be the entire URL of the hyperlink e.g. and NOT

    7. List

    8. Long Text

    9. Multiple level list

    10. Short Text

    11. Whole Number

    Bulk create does not support below custom field type:

    1. Tables

    2. Entity Relationship

    Additionally, the following system property fields are not supported when bulk creating work:

    1. Keep with me

    2. Keep Action with me

    3. Defects

    4. Files

    If you do have any validation errors, these will be highlighted in red and a ‘warning’ status icon will be displayed. If the input values are wrong throughout an entire column, validation errors will be displayed at the bottom of the grid e.g. if a field column is referenced in the upload file which does not exist in the system. If the input values are wrong for an individual row, a ‘warning’ status icon will be displayed at the start of the row and the individual validation errors will be highlighted in red. You will then need to modify the file, click to 'change file' and select to upload your updated file.

    You can still proceed with creation of the valid Case items in your upload file. The system will skip over the invalid rows and confirm creation of the valid ones, but the invalid items will need to be resolved before they can be created. You can do this by modifying the file and then clicking to 'change file' and select to upload your updated file.

    Click here to see the full list of potential validation errors for Bulk Create:

    Bulk Create is also supported in all of the languages that Enate offers: French, German, Spanish, Portuguese Brazilian, Romanian, Polish, Hungarian and Russian.

    Overview

    mandatory fields

    It should be noted that excel uploads of up to 2000 rows are supported in bulk create. Sheets with more rows than this can lead to potential errors.

    Bulk Create Templates

    Bulk Create Ticket Templates

    Bulk Create Case Templates

    Mandatory Fields

    Note that the Primary Contact and Requester fields are only mandatory for a Case when the '' option is set to 'on' for the Case type you are bulk creating in the Service Lines screen in Builder. If you do want to fill these fields in, make sure to.

    Note that all data entered must match existing values in the system, otherwise will be displayed.

    Requirement for contact records within your bulk upload file

    Optional Fields

    Date Formatting

    Custom Data Fields

    Supported Fields

    Unsupported Fields

    Validation Errors

    Multilingual Support

    Note: the bulk create template uploaded should be in the same language as the logged-in user’s preferred language. For example, if a Spanish user wants to upload a bulk create template, then the template they upload should be in Spanish.

    Additionally, the column header values in the bulk create template should match the values that are configured in Enate Builder in the . If the translations for fields like Primary contact, Requester, CC, Subject or any Custom Data Fields have been modified in the Localisations page, then the column headings in the bulk create template need to match these values.

    fail validation
    Potential Validation Errors for Bulk Creation of Work Items
    bulk-create-ticket_en-gb.xlsx
    18KB
    Open
    bulk-create-ticket_en-us.xlsx
    19KB
    Open
    bulk-create-ticket_fr-fr.xlsx
    19KB
    Open
    bulk-create-ticket_de-de.xlsx
    18KB
    Open
    bulk-create-ticket_es-419.xlsx
    18KB
    Open
    bulk-create-ticket_pt-br.xlsx
    18KB
    Open
    bulk-create-ticket_pt-br (v23.1 onwards).xlsx
    21KB
    Open
    bulk-create-ticket_ro-ro.xlsx
    18KB
    Open
    bulk-create-ticket_pl-pl.xlsx
    19KB
    Open
    bulk-create-ticket_hu-hu.xlsx
    19KB
    Open
    bulk-create-ticket_ru-ru.xlsx
    19KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_en-gb.xlsx
    41KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_en-us.xlsx
    41KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_fr-fr.xlsx
    18KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_de-de.xlsx
    19KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_es-419.xlsx
    20KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_pt-br.xlsx
    20KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_pt-br (v23.1 onwards).xlsx
    23KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_ro-ro.xlsx
    18KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_pl-pl.xlsx
    20KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_hu-hu.xlsx
    18KB
    Open
    bulk-create-case_ru-ru.xlsx
    18KB
    Open

    Date

    The date when the session was recorded

    Time Edited By

    Who last edited the session's recorded time

    Time Edited To

    What the session's recorded time has been edited to

    Date Edited

    The date when the session's recorded time was edited

    Ticket Category (Ticket Only)

    The category that the Ticket was in when the time was edited

    Users performs work away from Enate, then return to last focused tab before session timeout

    Time is tracked on the most recently focused work item tab. Most correct user behaviour.

    Multiple work item tabs open

    Users performs work away from Enate, then returns to a different tab, not the last focused tab, before session timeout

    Enate records time spent on the business application to the last focused tab, but subsequent time is added to the currently focused tab.

    Multiple work item tabs open

    Users performs work away from Enate, then clicks to switch the display of currently focussed work item tab to instead show Enate Home page

    Enate stops recording time on that work item tab, and does not start automatically recording anything until another work item tab is clicked onto.

    Non-work item tab opened, no work item tabs

    Users performs work away from Enate, then returns to Enate before the session timeout

    Time is not recorded as no work item tab was open. not ideal user behaviour from the time tracker feature pov.

    Non-work item tab opened, one work item tab open

    Users performs work away from Enate, then returns to Enate before the session timeout

    Time is recorded accurately on the work item tab if the user visited/opened it.

    Work item tab open

    Users performs work away from Enate, then Enate Tab gets closed without reopening

    Enate may not record this accurately.

    One or more Enate work item tabs open, browser minimized

    Users performs work away from Enate, then returns to Enate before the session timeout

    Time is tracked on the most recently focused work item tab.

    One or more Enate work item tabs open

    Users performs work away from Enate, User session times out (e.g., due to inactivity, browser closed, login in different device/browser)

    Enate may not record this accurately.

    One or more Enate work item tabs open

    User navigates to Enate website and logs out successfully.

    Enate accurately records time on the last focused tab.

    One or more Enate work item tabs open

    Internet connection lost, but then restored and user returns to Enate before session timeout.

    Enate accurately record time on the last focused tab.

    One or more Enate work item tabs open

    System crash or unexpected shutdown. User restarts the system and returns to Enate

    Time tracking may be incomplete or inaccurate due to the unexpected interruption.

    Work item tab open

    Users presses F5 / reloads the Enate tab

    Time is recorded accurately on the work item tab.

    Work item tab open

    Computer is put to sleep and then resumed within User session timeout values (i.e. user wouldn't be re-asked to sign into Enate).

    Time tracking will include the time the computer was asleep

    Work item tab open

    Computer is put to sleep and then resumed but after the user session has timed out.

    Enate may not record this accurately.

    here

    Processing a Ticket

    The statuses a Ticket moves through

    A Ticket is always in one of six statuses:

    Status
    What it means

    Draft

    The Ticket has been created manually and has not been saved for the first time yet.

    To Do

    The status button in the header ribbon offers To Do, In Progress, Waiting and Resolved. You move a Ticket to Closed by resolving it, and a Ticket leaves Draft the first time you save it. See for how to select and confirm a status.

    When manually starting a Ticket directly in Enate it will sit in a state of 'Draft' until it has been submitted for the first time.

    To submit a Ticket, you must:

    • Add a Title

    • Enter a Ticket description in the section provided (after submitting, this section will disappear and instead will show as the initial submission note).

    • Set a Ticket Category in the Settings Tab:

    • Set a Primary Contact and a Requester in the Contacts section.

    If any of these are missing, the system tells you which one when you try to save, for example 'Please enter a Ticket Title before continuing.' or 'Please specify a ticket category in the settings section before continuing.'

    Then hit the 'Submit' button.

    Once you have successfully submitted the Ticket, the Ticket will close and a confirmation pop-up will display showing that the Ticket has been submitted successfully and is now in a state of To Do.

    You can click the Ticket reference link on this message to immediately re-open the Ticket (note that the Ticket may still be processing if you re-open the tab immediately). Alternatively, you can re-open using the 'Recently Accessed' link at the foot of the navigation dropdown.

    Saving a Draft Ticket without choosing a different status moves it to To Do. You can also choose any of the other statuses from the status button before you save, so a Ticket that is answered on first contact can go straight from Draft to Resolved.

    Tickets that Enate creates for you never sit in Draft. A Ticket raised from an incoming email, from Self Service, in bulk, by a schedule, by a robot or as a linked work item starts in To Do.

    When you see a Ticket in a state of To Do, it means that it is not currently being progressed.

    The Ticket will sit in a status of To Do until a resource has picked it up. This could be a human resource or a robot resource.

    Once you start updating a Ticket in a state of To Do, it will:

    • automatically assign to you and

    • the status will change to 'In progress'

    You can also choose to change the state yourself.

    When a Ticket is in a state of In Progress, this signifies that work is now underway. It will stay in that status until it's resolved (unless it needs to be moved to a state of Wait).

    You can change the category of the Ticket after it has been initially categorised and an entry will appear in the timeline showing who changed the Ticket category, when they changed it and what it has been changed to.

    Note that you will need to have selected the 'Ticket Category Changed' option from the for this to show.

    If you've picked up a Ticket in error, or if your reach the conclusion that it's not a piece of work you're going to be able to progress, you can unassign it from yourself, either to another resource or just back to its Queue. This could be after 10 seconds or half an hour, but when you do this the system will automatically set the status back to 'To Do' to let everyone know that it's not going to be progressed until another resource picks it up. You can also just manually set the status back to 'To Do' if for example you started working on it in error and need to quickly undo the status change.

    Similarly, if a robot resource rejects a piece of work, its status will be set back to 'To Do' as part of handing it over for a human resource to carry out.

    If you're working on a Ticket and you have to temporarily halt work on it because you're waiting for some additional information or because of some other temporary blocker, you should choose the 'Wait' status.

    When placing a Ticket into a state of 'Wait', you need to specify the type of wait. The options are:

    If you confirm the Wait status without choosing a wait type, the system responds with 'Please specify a wait type before continuing.'

    A Ticket can also be put into a wait on related work items by the system, which happens when you split the Ticket or convert it into a Case. You cannot choose that wait type yourself, and you cannot edit a Ticket while it is in it.

    Impact on SLA clock: SLA clock PAUSES while a Ticket is in this state, IF the Ticket's Due Date rule (configured during process design) has set to ON. If it is set to OFF, the SLA clock CONTINUES while the Ticket is in this state.

    If you're working on a Ticket and you have to temporarily halt work on it because you're waiting for some information from a third party or client, you should choose 'Wait for more information' and then add the number of days you want to wait for a response.

    The field is labelled 'Number of days to wait (max 180)'. You must enter a whole number between 1 and 180. Anything outside that range is rejected with 'Please specify number of days (between 1-180) to wait before continuing.'

    If the Ticket's Due Date rule uses a working calendar, the days you enter are counted as working days using the working hours in a day for that Ticket. If it does not use a calendar, they are counted as calendar days.

    Upon confirming the 'Wait for more information' status, the Ticket will move from your Work Inbox into your Owned Work list, as there is no active work to be carried out on it until a response is received.

    Once a response has been received, the Ticket will move back from your Owned Work list into your Work Inbox in a state of To Do, highlighted for you to progress. Either an email or a Self Service message counts as a response.

    Alternatively, if you have set the 'Close if no response received' to On, then upon reaching the number of days to wait if there has been no response received from the client, the system resolves the Ticket for you with a resolution method of 'No Customer Response'. It then follows the normal route to Closed, so if a feedback window has been configured the Ticket sits in Resolved for that period first.

    While the wait is running, the Info Card tells you what will happen when it ends, for example 'Set to Wait For More Info until 14 Oct 2026 09:00. If no information is received, this Ticket will move back to To Do.'

    Impact on SLA clock: SLA clock CONTINUES while Ticket is in this state.

    If you're working on a Ticket and you have to temporarily halt work on it until a specific future date/time, you should choose 'Wait Until'.

    When you select 'Wait Until', you must specify the desired follow up date and time.

    The date and time must be in the future, and no more than one year ahead. If you leave it blank the system responds with 'Please specify a date to follow up on this Ticket before continuing.', and if the date has already passed it responds with 'Please set a follow up date and time in the future.'

    If the follow up date you choose is later than the Ticket's due date, the system warns you that 'This date is beyond the Due Date. This may result in SLA failure'. It does not stop you.

    Upon confirming the 'Wait Until' status, the Ticket will move from your Work Inbox into your Owned Work list, as there is no active work to be carried out on it until the follow up date.

    When this date is reached, the Ticket will move back from your Owned Work list into your Work Inbox in a state of To Do, highlighted for you to progress.

    While a Ticket is waiting, the Info Card offers an 'Edit Wait' button. Use this to change the wait type or its settings without first moving the Ticket to another status. The same rules on days to wait and follow up dates apply.

    Re-select this option if you wish to take the Ticket off 'Wait'.

    You signify completing a Ticket by marking it as Resolved.

    In addition to marking the Ticket as resolved you must specify the 'Resolution Method', with the following options:

    Resolution Method
    When to use it

    'Rejected As Spam' only appears in the list for a Ticket that was created from an incoming email. Resolving as 'Rejected As Spam' is also the one case where the Ticket does not need a Primary Contact and a Requester.

    If you try to save a resolution without picking a method, the system responds with 'Please specify a resolution type before continuing.'

    The Ticket will then move to a state of Closed, unless a feedback window has been set for it, in which case it will move to a state of Resolved. See below for on this.

    When you select to resolve a Ticket, if it has been configured this way in your system (see for more information), you must either:

    • Send a resolution email

    or

    • Add an internal resolution note

    This applies when you resolve with 'With Customer Response'. If you mark the Ticket as resolved and have not done either of these, the system will bring up a reminder message:

    If you then choose to send a resolution email, the system will show this with a green tick in the email or note:

    You will then be able to mark the Ticket as resolved.

    If you have already added a resolution

    If you have just added a note or sent an email before marking as 'resolved', the system will automatically mark this accordingly, and will not ask you to add a further resolution confirmation.

    Subsequent Resolution Note / Email display in timeline.

    For resolved Tickets, you will be able to see the note / email which was tagged as the resolution highlighted in green with tick marker:

    Quick Resolution

    For quick resolution, you can also send your resolving email and mark the Ticket as resolved in a single click. Just click the 'Send and Resolve' button at the foot of the email you are sending.

    Some resolution methods cannot be picked from the dropdown because the system sets them when you carry out an activity on the Ticket:

    Resolution Method
    What caused it

    After a Ticket has been resolved it may sit in that status for a brief period if a Feedback Window has been set for it. During this time period the service recipient may respond and the Ticket may be reopened, either manually using the 'Reopen' button or automatically upon receipt of a new incoming email or feedback within the time period.

    The length of the feedback window comes from the 'Keep Ticket Open' setting on the Ticket Category in Builder. If no days are set there but the Ticket is being resolved with an outgoing email, the window runs until that email is due to be sent. If neither applies, the Ticket goes straight to Closed.

    Clicking 'Reopen' puts the Ticket back into To Do and assigns it to you. When the system reopens the Ticket because new information arrived, it also puts the Ticket into To Do but leaves the assignee as it was. Either way the Info Card then shows 'Last Reopened By' with the date and time.

    After the feedback window has completed without any further response, the Ticket will move to a state of fully 'Closed'. Any subsequent mails received will launch a brand new work item.

    A Ticket arrives by email into the HR Services mailbox and Enate creates 10040-T in a status of To Do.

    1. Ranjit opens the Ticket. Because he starts updating it, Enate assigns it to him and moves it to In Progress.

    2. He needs the employee's payslip reference, so he replies to the requester, selects Waiting, chooses a wait type of 'Wait for more information', enters 5 days and leaves 'Close If No Response Received' clear. He clicks Save Changes. The tab closes and the Ticket moves from his Work Inbox into his Owned Work list. The Info Card reads 'Set to Wait For More Info until 26 Sep 2026 14:20. If no information is received, this Ticket will move back to To Do.'

    3. The employee replies two days later. The New Information icon lights up and the Ticket returns to Ranjit's Work Inbox in a status of To Do, with a reason of 'New Information Received'.

    Email Feedback Report

    The Email Feedback Report displays information relating to email ratings feedback that users are receiving, allowing users to quickly and clearly see developing trends with regards to client feedback given via email ratings.

    How does the Email Feedback Report Work

    The Email Feedback Report collates information received via feedback ratings in emails (happy, neutral, unhappy) and displays this information in a number of different ways such as absolute total ratings, feedback over time and feedback in different scenarios such as feedback by ticket categories or feedback when defects have been raised.

    Accessing the Email Feedback Report

    Access to and the ability to edit the email feedback report is controlled by permissions in user roles, in the same way as all other reports within Enate. If users do not have the right permissions enabled, they will not be able to access the report. To edit the report users will need the 'Create Custom Reports' permission enabled.

    Email Feedback Report Default Structure

    Total Ratings & Share By Feedback Type

    This chart displays the total number of feedback ratings received, categorized by their sentiment (Happy, Neutral, Unhappy), along with the percentage share for each category. Both the Happy and Unhappy emojis are interactive, i.e. clicking on them will filter the page content accordingly.

    Feedback Trend

    This chart displays the trend of count of feedback ratings over their received time. The display is defaulted to 6 months moving average, but can be adjusted.

    This chart categorizes Feedback Ratings based on different contexts such as Customer, Contract, Service or Process, sorted by the rating count of highest total number of Happy or Unhappy ratings. It also has a sentiment selector drop-down where users can now choose which sentiment to display on a chart. By default this chart displays with both Happy and Unhappy sentiment selected.

    This chart ranks userss based on feedback rating volume received on the work items they were responsible for. The chart can be toggled between displaying a top 5 or top 10 of users for each sentiment type.

    This chart compares feedback ratings associated with work items With and Without defects, allowing you to assess the impact on client feedback of any issues taking place during the processing of a work item. Note: The specific number of defects on individual work item has not been taken into consideration.

    This chart compares feedback ratings related to reopened and non-reopened work items. Here the term non-reopened work items means work items which are running, successfully resolved or closed normally.

    This chart evaluates feedback ratings associated with work items that have been reassigned multiple times, allowing you to assess the effect on client feedback on user continuity within the processing of a work item.

    This chart analyzes feedback ratings based on the time taken to resolve and close work items, measured in hours. Please note: this does not include still-running work items.

    This chart will replace the previous 'Feedback by Work Item SLA' chart. The legends of the new chart are as follows:

    • High Priority Zone: SLA Not Met + Unhappy Ratings.

    • Success Optimization Zone: SLA Met + Unhappy Ratings.

    • Positive Zones: SLA Met + Happy Ratings.

    • Neutral Zones: SLA Met or SLA Not Met + Neutral Ratings.

    Hovering over the chart will show the options where a Question Mark will appear. Hovering over the question mark will show the tool-tip which explains the zones, to help users better understand each section.

    Sentiment Zones Explained:

    • High Priority Zones: Negative sentiment + SLA missed – needs urgent attention.

    • Success Optimization Zones: Negative sentiment + SLA met – SLA OK, but experience needs work.

    • Neutral / Positive Zone: Feedback aligns with sentiment – either neutral or positive.

    The Chart shows feedback ratings received on work items by ticket categories, with concatenated levels i.e. “Level 1 > Level 2 > Level 3”.

    This chart displays the feedback rating count, categorized by the number of times a work item has been reopened. The grouping 'buckets' are: 1-3 Times, 3-5 Times, 5-7 Times, or 7+ Times. This will help with assessment on the relationship between client feedback ratings and the number of times a work item was reopened.

    See below for a complete list of all the available data fields that can be used within the Email Feedback report:

    Table
    Fields
    Description

    Report Visual & Measure Reference

    Visual & Measure Reference

    The full list of cards and visuals across all six tabs, with the underlying measure and source tables for each. Use this when you're building or personalising a visual and need to know which field feeds it.

    Tab
    Visual (Display Name)
    Type
    Underlying Measure(s)
    Source Table(s)

    Processing a Case

    Cases can be started in the following ways:

    • Via an incoming email (if the system is configured to do so for that email mailbox)

    • By a 'Start Case' Action within another Case flow.

    • Manually, from the 'Create New Work Item' link in the Work Manager toolbar

    User's Overview Report

    The User's Overview report displays information regarding the Enate user who's account has been used to sign in. The report shows all work relating to user allowing them to quickly plan their day and week accordingly.

    Access to and the ability to edit the User's Overview is controlled by permissions in user roles, in the same way as all other reports within Enate. If users do not have the right permissions enabled, they will not be able to access or edit the report.

    Here are some of the type of information which can be found within the report

    • Pinpoint priority areas with SLA-tracked open work items by queues for efficient task management.

    Operations Summary

    Work Items Started

    KPI Card

    Work Items Started

    Work Items, Date

    Operations Summary

    Work Items Open

    KPI Card

    Work Items Started, Status < 5

    Work Items, Date

    Operations Summary

    Work Items Overdue

    KPI Card

    Work Items Started, _IsOverdue = 1

    Work Items, Date

    Operations Summary

    SLA Compliance

    KPI Card

    SLA % On EndDate

    Work Items, Date

    Operations Summary

    AHT in Hrs

    KPI Card

    Avg Handling Time in Hrs

    Activity, Work Items, Users, Date

    Operations Summary

    Daily Active Users

    KPI Card

    Daily Active Users

    Activity, Date

    Operations Summary

    Monthly Volume — Received vs Closed

    Clustered Column

    Work Items Started; Closed

    Work Items, Date

    Operations Summary

    By Process (Top 10)

    Donut

    Work Items Started

    Work Items, Process, Date

    Operations Summary

    Top 10 Agents — Throughput & AHT

    Table

    Closed; AHT; SLA %

    Work Items, Activity, Users, Date

    Volume & Workload

    Work Items On Target

    KPI Card

    Started, _IsOverdue = 0, Status < 5

    Work Items, Date

    Volume & Workload

    Work Items Closed

    KPI Card

    Work Items Closed

    Work Items, Date

    Volume & Workload

    Daily Volume Trend

    Line

    Work Items Started; Closed

    Work Items, Date

    Volume & Workload

    Status Breakdown By Customer

    100% Stacked Bar

    Work Items Started by Status

    Work Items, Date

    Volume & Workload

    Ageing Distribution

    Clustered Column

    Work Items Started by Ageing Category

    Work Items, Date

    Volume & Workload

    Queue Wise Count

    Bar

    Work Items Started by Queue

    Work Items, Queues, Date

    Quality & Defects

    Defects Count

    KPI Card

    Defects Count

    Defects, Date

    Quality & Defects

    Work Items Reopened

    KPI Card

    Started, _IsReOpened = TRUE

    Work Items, Process, Date

    Quality & Defects

    Work Items Reworked

    KPI Card

    Started, CountOfRework > 0

    Work Items, Date

    Quality & Defects

    Peer Review Failure Count

    KPI Card

    Peer Review Failure Count

    Work Items, Date

    Quality & Defects

    Defects Trend

    Area

    Defects Count over time

    Defects, Date

    Quality & Defects

    Party At Fault

    Clustered Bar

    Defects Count by Party

    Defects, Date

    Quality & Defects

    Defects By Queue

    Bar

    Defects Count by Queue / Is Resolved

    Defects, Queues, Date

    SLA & Cycle Time

    SLA Compliance

    KPI Card

    SLA % On EndDate

    Work Items, Date

    SLA & Cycle Time

    Avg TAT (Days)

    KPI Card

    Avg TAT (Days)

    Work Items, Date

    SLA & Cycle Time

    SLA Compliance Trend

    Line

    SLA % On EndDate over time

    Work Items, Date

    SLA & Cycle Time

    Ageing Distribution — Open

    Clustered Bar

    Started (open only) by Ageing

    Work Items, Date

    SLA & Cycle Time

    Avg TAT (Days) By Queue

    Table

    Avg TAT (Days) by Queue

    Work Items, Queues, Date

    Agent Performance

    Work Items Resolved Per User

    KPI Card

    Resolved Per User (Insights Users)

    Work Items, Users, Date

    Agent Performance

    % Utilisation

    KPI Card

    % Utilisation

    Insights, Date

    Agent Performance

    % Productivity

    KPI Card

    % Productivity

    Insights, Date

    Agent Performance

    Agent Leaderboard

    Table

    Resolved; Util %; Prod %; SLA %; AHT

    Work Items, Activity, Insights, Users, Date

    Agent Performance

    Time Allocation Breakdown

    Stacked Column

    8 duration categories (Hrs)

    Insights, Date

    Agent Performance

    Responsible Agents

    Bar

    Work Items Started (Insights Users)

    Work Items, Users, Date

    Agent Performance

    Active Users Trend

    Area

    Active Users (Insights Users)

    Activity, Users, Date

    Communications

    Incoming / Outgoing / Thank You

    KPI Card

    Email Count by Date (by type)

    Communications, Date

    Communications

    Unprocessed Emails

    KPI Card

    Email Count (Unprocessed)

    Communications, Date

    Communications

    Volume Trend — Incoming vs Outgoing

    Line

    Email Count by type over time

    Communications, Date

    Communications

    By Process

    Bar

    Email Count by Process / type

    Communications, Process, Date

    Context

    Customer

    Name of the Customer

    Context

    Service

    Name of the Service

    Context

    Service Line

    Name of the Service Line

    Context

    Supplier

    Name of the Supplier

    Dates

    Date

    Calendar range of dates for filtering data

    Dates

    Month

    Months of the dates

    Dates

    Year

    Year of the dates

    Process

    Process Name

    Name of the process each Work Item belongs to

    Process

    ProcessGroup

    Process group given for Cases / Tickets

    Process

    Work Item Type

    Type of the Work Item (Ticket, Action or Case)

    Queues

    Queue

    Name of the queue the Work Item was last present in

    Sentiment Scores

    6M Moving Avg

    6 months moving average over the number of emails that have sentiment scores. To be visualised against dates.

    Sentiment Scores

    CaseCount

    Total number of Cases

    Sentiment Scores

    Email Count

    Total number of emails that sentiment score

    Sentiment Scores

    PercentagesOfAllSentiments

    Percentage of emails with positive,negative & neutral sentiment compared to the total

    Sentiment Scores

    TicketCount

    Total number of Tickets

    Sentiment Scores

    Total Work Items

    Total number of workitems with emails that have sentiment score

    Sentiment Scores

    ImpactZonesSentiment

    Imapct zones based on combination of SLA & Sentiment Types (High Priority, Neutral, Positive, Success Optimization)

    Sentiment Scores

    Logged

    Email logged date in date time format

    Sentiment Scores

    LoggedDate

    Email logged date in date format

    Sentiment Scores

    Sender

    Email sender's full name or email address (depending on whichever is availible)

    Sentiment Scores

    Sentiment Confidence

    Confidence level of the email classification (or sentiment score) in percentage (0 - 100%)

    Sentiment Scores

    PercentageSentimentConfidence

    Sentiment Confidence shown in percentage

    Sentiment Types

    Sentiment Type

    Types of sentiment (Positve, Negative or Neutral)

    Ticket Categories

    Ticket Category1

    Ticket Category level 1

    Ticket Categories

    Ticket Category2

    Ticket Category level 2

    Ticket Categories

    Ticket Category3

    Ticket Category level 3

    Ticket Categories

    ConcatTicketCategoryLabels

    Combined representation of Ticket Category level 1, 2 & 3

    Users

    Email Address

    Email address of the user responsible for the work item

    Users

    Team Manager

    Full name of the manager of the users responsible for the work item

    Users

    User Name

    Full name of the user responsible for the work item

    Work Items

    Assigned User Count

    Assigned User Count is the unique number of users assigned to the work item througout it's lifecycle (from start to end).

    Work Items

    Assigned User Count Groups

    Grouping of Assigned User Count into different buckets (e.g., 0, 1-3, 3-5, 5-7 etc.)

    Work Items

    Customer Duration(Hrs)

    Total time (in working hours) taken to complete the work item as per the customer calendar. Value will be blank if the work item is still in progress.

    Work Items

    Customer Duration Groups

    Grouping of Customer Durations into different buckets (e.g., 0-24, 24-48, 48-72, 5-7 etc.)

    Work Items

    DueDate

    Work Item Due Date in date time format

    Work Items

    EndDate

    Work Item End Date in date time format

    Work Items

    Has Defects

    Whether the Work Item has defect or not (Yes or No)

    Work Items

    Is Reopened

    Tickets that got opened after going to resolved status

    Work Items

    Reference

    Reference number of each Work Item

    Work Items

    Reopened Count

    Number of times the work item got reopened throughout it's lifecycle

    Work Items

    Reopened Count Groups

    Grouping of Reopened Count into different buckets (e.g., 1-3, 3-5, 5-7, 7+ etc.)

    Work Items

    ResolvedDate

    Work Items Resolved Date in date time format

    Work Items

    SLA

    Service Level Agreement to indicate where Work Item is Overdue or not

    Work Items

    StartDate

    Work Item Start Date in date time format

    Work Items

    Supplier Duration(Hrs)

    Total time (in working hours) taken to complete the work item as per the supplier calendar. Value will be blank if the work item is still in progress.

    Work Items

    Title

    Title of the Work Item

    Context

    Contract

    Name of the Contract

    Feedback Comparison By Context

    Users Receiving the Most Happy & Unhappy Feedback Ratings

    Feedback ratings With Defects

    Feedback By Reopened Work Items

    Feedback By Number Of Work Item Handoffs

    Feedback by Work Item Total Elapsed Time

    Impact Zones

    Feedback By Ticket Categories

    Feedback By Number of Times Work Item Reopened

    Available Data Fields for Email Feedback

    see here for more information
    here
    permissions in Builder
    see here for more information
    here
    Makes Contacts Mandatory

    Rejected As Spam

    The Ticket was created from an unwanted email.

    Cancel

    A member of the support team closed the Ticket.

    Rejected Unconfigured Email Address

    The Ticket came from an email sent to an address that is not set up as an Email Route.

    Ranjit answers the query, sends the reply and clicks 'Send and Resolve'. The Ticket is resolved with a resolution method of 'With Customer Response'.

  • The Ticket Category has 'Keep Ticket Open' set to 3 days, so the Ticket sits in Resolved. On day 2 the employee emails again, so Enate reopens the Ticket into To Do and assigns it back to Ranjit.

  • Ranjit answers and resolves again. This time nothing arrives within 3 days, so the Ticket moves to Closed with a reason of 'Feedback Window Passed'. A further email from the employee now creates a brand new Ticket.

  • The Ticket is waiting for a resource to pick it up.

    In Progress

    Work is underway on the Ticket.

    Waiting

    Work has been halted until something happens.

    Resolved

    The work is complete and the feedback window is open.

    Closed

    The Ticket is finished.

    With Customer Response

    The request has been answered and you have communicated the outcome to the service recipient.

    No Customer Response

    The Ticket is complete but no response was received or none is needed.

    Rejected

    Case Launched

    The Ticket was converted into a Case.

    Split Into Multiple Tickets

    The Ticket was split.

    Merged

    Initial Ticket Submission

    Note: For manually created Tickets which have yet to have a title and description entered for them, if you send out an email prior to initial submitting (and saving) of the Ticket, the system will auto-populate the Ticket title and description from the email subject and description respectively. Upon sending an email, the email's subject and body are copied into the Ticket's title and description.

    Setting a Ticket Category

    Setting a Ticket back to 'To Do'

    Using 'Wait' for Tickets

    Wait for more information for Tickets

    Wait Until for Tickets

    Enate checks for waits that have expired every 30 seconds, so a Ticket comes off Wait shortly after its follow up date and time rather than exactly on it.

    Editing an existing wait

    Set back to 'In Progress'

    Resolving a Ticket

    Resolution Email/Note

    Note, this option is not available if you are sending an email from the pop-out screen. You need to come back to the main Ticket browser screen to confirm resolution of the Ticket.

    Resolution methods the system sets for you

    Feedback Window

    Please note that when work items are reopened, the data stored for who resolved it and when it was resolved are persisted, and are not overwritten when the item is resolved for a second time.

    The 'Reopen' button is only available while a Ticket is Resolved. Once a Ticket is Closed it cannot be reopened, and anyone following it is automatically unfollowed.

    Note: You can easily move an item from draft straight through to resolved, a good example of this is a ticket query which gets resolved on first contact.

    Worked example: a payroll query that waits for the employee

    The Ticket Screen
    see here for more information
    timeline filter
    Wait for more information
    Wait Until
    'Add Wait Time To Due Date'
    more information
    here

    The request is not something your team will action.

    The Ticket was merged into another work item.

    Automatically started

  • Via third party integrations

  • A Case is always in one of six statuses:

    Status
    What it means

    Draft

    The Case has been created manually and has not been saved for the first time yet.

    To Do

    The Case is waiting to be picked up, or it needs attention.

    In Progress

    When manually starting a Case directly in Enate, it will sit in a state of 'Draft' until it has been submitted for the first time.

    When starting manually, you should fill in the 'Case Short Description'.

    A Case cannot leave Draft without one. If you try to save without it, the system responds with 'Please enter a Case Title/Short Description before continuing.'

    If the Case process is linked to a schedule, the Info Card also asks you to pick the schedule period while the Case is in Draft. If you do not, the system responds with 'Please select current schedule for this case.'

    Saving a Draft Case without choosing a different status moves it to To Do.

    Once a Case has been submitted into Enate, it will then sit in a status of 'To Do' until a resource has picked it up. This could be a human resource or a robot resource. Once you start updating a Case sitting in this state, it will:

    • automatically assign to you and

    • the status will change to 'In progress'

    You can also choose to change the state yourself. This signifies that work is now underway and it will stay in that status until it's resolved, assuming for example no waiting for further information.

    A Case in To Do also moves itself to In Progress as soon as one of its Actions moves past To Do, so a Case usually starts running without anyone having to touch it.

    If you've picked up a Case in error, or if your reach the conclusion that it's not a piece of work you're going to be able to progress you can unassign it from yourself, either to another resource or just back to its Queue. This could be after 10 seconds or half an hour, but when you do this the system will automatically set the status back to 'To Do' to let everyone know that it's not going to be progressed until another resource picks it up. You can also just manually set the status back to 'To Do' if for example you started working on it in error and need to quickly undo the status change.

    Similarly if a robot resource rejects a piece of work, its status will be set back to 'To Do' as part of handing it over for a human resource to carry out.

    Additionally, if there is a problem with a Case (usually be because of an issue with one of its Actions), the Case will be put back into a state of 'To Do'.

    Enate flags a Case as needing attention when:

    • An Action was resolved as 'Unable to Complete'.

    • A step finished and the Case is configured for manual step progression, so it will not move on by itself.

    • The next step is empty and the Case is configured to pause on empty steps.

    • A Case started from an email or a schedule is missing a mandatory Primary Contact, or one of its contacts has no first name.

    Once the Case is in this state, the Case owner can see this along with the reason, which is often the problem Action, in the Info Card. As Case Owner, you have various options available to you:

    • Rework the Case from a previous step or from completed Actions within this step

    • Place the Case on Wait, using the Pause wait type

    • Reset the Case to In Progress

    • Manually launch / re-launch Actions

    While the Case is flagged as needing attention it will not launch any Actions that are queued up behind it. Tick the 'Issue resolved, allow the Case to continue' checkbox in the Info Card to clear the flag.

    When you move a Case that needs attention from To Do to In Progress, the Info Card asks 'How to proceed':

    Option
    What it does
    When it is offered

    Resume

    Carries on with the Actions that are already running.

    One or more of the Case's Actions is still running.

    Move to Next Step

    Moves the Case on to its next step and launches that step's Actions.

    If you're working on a Case and you have to temporarily halt work on it because you're waiting for some additional information or because of some other temporary blocker, you should choose the 'Wait' status.

    When a Case is in a state of Waiting, no more new Actions for that Case will be launched until the Case moves back into a state of To Do or In Progress. Users can complete Actions that have already launched and are already running Actions, but once these Actions have been completed, no new Actions will get launched.

    Actions that would have launched while the Case is waiting are held as pending Actions, and Enate launches them as soon as the Case returns to To Do or In Progress. A Case that still has pending Actions queued up is not treated as complete.

    When placing a Case into a state of 'Wait' you need to specify the type of wait. The options are:

    • Wait for more information

    • Wait Until

    • Pause

    Two further wait types appear on a Case but cannot be chosen by you, because the system sets them:

    • Related Work Items, when the Case has finished its own work but a Sub Case is still running. The Case resolves itself when the Sub Cases complete.

    • Wait for External System, when the Case is waiting on an external system to respond.

    Impact on SLA clock: SLA clock PAUSES while Case is in this state, IF the Case's Due Date rule (configured during process design) has 'Add Wait Time To Due Date' set to ON. If it is set to OFF, the SLA Clock CONTINUES while Case is in this state.

    If you're working on a Case and you have to temporarily halt work on it because you're waiting for some information from a third party or client, you should choose 'Wait for more information'.

    When a Case is in a state of Waiting, no more new Actions for that Case will be launched until the Case moves back into a state of To Do or In Progress. Users can complete Actions that have already launched and are already running Actions, but once these Actions have been completed, no new Actions will get launched.

    When you click on 'Wait for more information', you must choose the reason for placing the Case in that state from the 'Wait Reason' dropdown.

    The options are:

    • Awaiting Information from 3rd Party

    • Awaiting Information from Client

    • Awaiting Information from Internal Party

    • Other

    The reason is mandatory. If you leave it blank the system responds with 'Please select the reason you are waiting for more information.'

    There is a fifth reason, 'Awaiting Information from Action', which you cannot choose. Enate sets it when an Action that is configured to pause its parent Case goes into a wait for more information. When that Action comes off Wait, the Case resumes automatically.

    Upon confirming the 'Wait for more information' status, the Case will move from your Work Inbox into your Owned Work list, as there is no active work to be carried out on it until a response is received.

    Once a response has been received, the Case will move back from your Owned Work list into your Work Inbox in a state of To Do, highlighted for you to progress.

    The Remaining Hours of SLA when a Case is set to 'Waiting for more Information' will be displayed. To explain..

    If a Case is set to 'Waiting for more Information' and the option to 'Add Wait Time To Due Date' is set to ON in the Case's Due Date rule (defined during process design in Builder), then the system will PAUSE the SLA clock. In conjunction with this, the Due Date value normally displayed on the Case header bar will be hidden (because until the SLA clock starts again, we can't know it!). In its place, the system will show the remaining time which was left until the Case is due at the point where it was put into this state (or how long it was overdue at the point where it was put into this state, if it has already passed the due date).

    Example: If the Case is yet to pass the due date the the message will show as 'Due: Paused x h y m before due'.

    Example: If the work has passed the due date then the message will show as 'Due: Paused x h y m after overdue'.

    Impact on SLA Clock: SLA Clock CONTINUES while Case is in this state.

    If you're working on a Case and you have to temporarily halt work on it until a specific future date/time, you should choose 'Wait Until'.

    When a Case is in this state, no more new Actions for that Case will be launched until the Follow Up Datetime has been reached. Users can complete Actions that have already launched and are already running Actions, but once these Actions have been completed, no new Actions will get launched.

    When you click on 'Wait Until', you must specify the desired follow up date and time.

    The date and time must be in the future and no more than one year ahead. If the follow up date you choose is later than the Case's due date, the system warns you that 'This date is beyond the Due Date. This may result in SLA failure'. It does not stop you.

    Upon confirming the 'Wait Until' status, the Case will move from your Work Inbox into your Owned Work list, as there is no active work to be carried out on it until the follow up date.

    When this date is reached, the Case will move back from your Owned Work list into your Work Inbox in a state of To Do, highlighted for you to progress. If everything in the Case has in fact been completed by then, the Case moves straight to Closed instead.

    Impact on SLA Clock: SLA Clock CONTINUES while Case is in this state.

    If you're working on a Case and you have to temporarily halt work on it, but you are not waiting for some information from a third party or client, or waiting until a specific future date/time, you should choose 'Pause'.

    When a Case is in a state of Waiting, no more new Actions for that Case will be launched until a user actively changes the status of the Case to To Do or In Progress. There is no automatic way of taking a Case out of a state of Pause, it can only be done manually. Users can complete Actions that have already launched and are already running Actions, but once these Actions have been completed, no new Actions will get launched.

    Upon confirming the 'Pause' status, the Case will move from your Work Inbox into your Owned Work list, as there is no active work to be carried out on it by you until a user actively changes the status of the Case to To Do or In Progress.

    When this is done, the Case will move back from your Owned Work list into your Work Inbox in a state of To Do, highlighted for you to progress.

    The one exception is a Case that was paused because one of its Actions paused it. That Case resumes by itself when the Action comes off Wait.

    While a Case is waiting, the Info Card offers an 'Edit Wait' button. Use this to change the wait type, the wait reason or the follow up date without first moving the Case to another status.

    Most Cases resolve themselves. When all the steps, Actions and Sub Cases in a Case are completed, the system resolves the Case with a resolution method of 'All Actions And Cases Closed'.

    The Case moves into a state of 'Resolved' if the Case has been configured with a feedback window, using the 'Keep Case Open' setting on the Case Info tab in Builder. It will sit in this status for a brief period during which the service recipient may respond and the Case may be reopened, either manually or automatically upon receipt of a new incoming email or feedback within the time period.

    If all the work is complete but the Case is flagged as needing attention, Enate does not resolve it. It puts the Case into Waiting with a reason of 'One or more Actions not completed successfully', for the Case Owner to deal with.

    Selecting Resolved from the status button asks you for a resolution method. Two options can appear:

    Option
    What it does
    When it is offered

    Complete

    Resolves the Case as finished.

    Only when every step and Action in the Case has been completed.

    Cancel

    Aborts the Case.

    If the Case still has work outstanding, Complete is not offered and Cancel is your only option.

    After the feedback window has completed without any further response, or if the Case does not have a feedback window, the Case will move to a state of fully 'Closed'. Any subsequent mails received will launch a brand new work item.

    The 'Reopen' button only appears on a Case that is Resolved and whose Case process has been configured to allow reopening. Clicking it puts the Case back into In Progress and assigns it to you. Note that this differs from a Ticket, which reopens into To Do.

    If new information arrives while the Case is Resolved and inside its feedback window, Enate reopens the Case into To Do.

    Once a Case is Closed it cannot be reopened, and anyone following it is automatically unfollowed.

    Selecting the 'Cancel' option and hitting the button to confirm will abort the Case. It will be completely closed and will no longer be available to process. If you re-open the tab for this item, system will confirm that the Case has been aborted.

    Cancelling a Case also closes every Action and Sub Case under it that has not already finished. They are closed with a reason of 'Cancelled' and none of them can be reopened.

    If the Case flow reaches an End Case Action, Enate closes every Action and Sub Case still running under the Case and resolves the Case, both with a reason of 'End Case'. The Case then follows its normal route to Closed.

    10040-C, 'Jack Jones new starter', is launched from a Ticket and starts in To Do.

    1. The first step launches an HR Approval Action. As soon as someone picks that Action up, the Case moves itself to In Progress.

    2. Step 2 launches a 'Send Contract' Action. The contract is sent and the Action waits for a reply. The Action is configured to pause its parent Case, so the Case moves to Waiting with a wait type of 'Wait For More Information' and a wait reason of 'Awaiting Information from Action'.

    3. While the Case waits, the Actions for step 3 are not launched. They are held as pending Actions.

    4. Jack returns the signed contract. The Action comes off Wait, the Case resumes to In Progress by itself, and the pending step 3 Actions launch.

    5. The last Action in step 3 is resolved as 'Unable to Complete'. Enate puts the Case into To Do and flags it as needing attention, with a reason of 'Action Unable To Complete'.

    6. The Case Owner reads the reason, ticks 'Issue resolved, allow the Case to continue', selects In Progress and chooses 'Move to Next Step'. The Case carries on.

    7. When the last step finishes, Enate resolves the Case with a resolution method of 'All Actions And Cases Closed'. The Case process has 'Keep Case Open' set to 5 days, so the Case sits in Resolved for 5 days and then moves to Closed.

    Initial Case Submission

    How Cases move through the different states

    Setting an Item back to 'To Do'

    Needs Attention

    Using 'Wait' state for a Case

    'Wait for more information' for a Case

    What shows for Due Date when SLA Clock pauses on Cases in 'Waiting for more Information'

    'Wait for more information' is the only wait type that can pause the SLA clock. Wait Until, Pause, Related Work Items and Wait for External System all leave the clock running.

    'Wait Until' for a Case

    Enate checks for waits that have expired every 30 seconds, so a Case comes off Wait shortly after its follow up date and time rather than exactly on it.

    'Pause' for a Case

    Editing an existing wait

    Resolving a Case

    Resolving a Case yourself

    Please note that when work items are reopened, the data stored for who resolved it and when it was resolved are persisted and are not overwritten when the item is resolved for a second time.

    Reopening a Case

    Cancelling/Aborting a Case

    Ending a Case early

    Worked example: a new starter Case that pauses for a signature

    Streamline workload management with monthly counts of started and closed work items, ensuring timely service delivery.

    • Prioritize corrective actions with counts of resolved and unresolved defects by category, enhancing service quality.

    • See which defect categories are being used and how many times they are used.

    • Gauge resource utilization and boost productivity with monthly-tracked active hours logged in Enate.

    See below for a complete list of all the available data fields that can be used within the User's Overview report:

    Table
    Fields
    Description

    Accessing the User's Overview Report

    User's Overview Report Default Structure

    Open Work Items by Queue & SLA

    Closed Work Items by Month & SLA

    Started & Closed Work Item Count by Month

    Most Used Defect Categories

    Active Hours Logged by Month

    Available Data Fields for User's Overview

    See section about contact record requirements
    See section about contact record requirements
    https://www.enate.io/
    Enate Website
    Make Contacts Mandatory
    adhere to contact record requirements
    validation errors
    Localisations page

    Team View Report

    The Team View report displays information relating to email sentiment analysis allowing users to quickly and clearly see developing trends regarding incoming emails and take action where necessary.

    Accessing the Team View Report

    Access to and the ability to edit the Team View is controlled by permissions in user roles, in the same way as all other reports within Enate. If users do not have the right permissions enabled, they will not be able to access or edit the report.

    Here are some of the type of information which can be found within the report

    Team view Report Default Structure

    Work Items Started by Month

    • Ensure uninterrupted service and efficient workload planning by tracking monthly work item initiation volumes.

    Work Items Closed by Month

    • Optimize resource availability and streamline operational efficiency by monitoring monthly work item closures.

    • Prioritize backlog resolution and task management by categorizing open work items by age in days.

    • Aid targeted defect resolution and service quality improvement by highlighting defect categories needing attention.

    • Enable efficient resource allocation and service delivery optimization with monthly user and active user counts.

    See below for a complete list of all the available data fields that can be used within the User Insights report:

    Table
    Fields

    Notifications

    Overview

    Enate's Notifications keep you up to date on what's happening with any Tickets, Actions and Cases you're interested in to keep you in the loop at all times. You've got lots of flexibility with how you receive notifications, in terms of which items you follow, what events you're notified about for them and how they're delivered to you.

    You've got various options at your disposal:

    • Follow individual Work Items

    • Follow all Work in your Work Inbox

    • Follow all work in your Queues

    You can choose to get notifications about a particular work item - just open it in Work Manager and click the 'Follow' option in the header bar.

    While you're following a work item, you'll receive a notification whenever any of the occur - things like changes in state, changes in its assignee, etc.. If you have , you will receive copies of your notifications via those channels too.

    You can 'Unfollow' a work item at any point by clicking 'Unfollow' from the work item screen.

    You can choose which notifications you want to receive and how by going to your and clicking to view your .

    In addition to choosing to follow an individual work item, you can also use the notifications settings page to specify more generally which notifications you want to automatically receive. There are two parts to this:

    • First, you specify which work items you want to receive, e.g. item's in your own Work Inbox.

    • Further to this, you specify which events about those work items you want to be notified about.

    See below for details ..

    You can choose to receive notifications for work items in your and/or for work items in your .

    Work Item Type
    Detail
    Notes

    In addition to this, you need to choose which events you want to be notified about for these Work Items.

    The options are as follows:

    Type of Notification
    Detail
    Notes

    For each event you subscribe to, you will automatically get notified in Work Manager in the (via the Notifications icon in the header bar) - with a counter showing the number of unread notifications. However you can additionally choose if you also want to be notified by and/or by .

    The Notifications icon shows you how many unread notification messages you have.

    Clicking on the Notifications icon will display your Notifications Centre.

    This will show the notification messages you have received (displaying the latest 100 notifications), sorted into 'All' and 'Unread'.

    Clicking on the notification will take you to the work item it relates to.

    You also have the option to mark individual and (from the ellipses menu) all notifications as read.

    The Do Not Disturb option turns off all email and browser pop-up notifications. Note: you'll still continue to receive notifications in your Notifications Centre.

    You can adjust your notification preferences by clicking on the 'Notification Settings' option or by going to you and then clicking to view ''.

    If you have Browser pop-up notifications turned on, whenever a notification is generated they will appear on the bottom-right of your screen. Clicking on the link to the work item will take you direct to that work item.

    Browser pop-up notifications will appear on any screen as long as you are logged into a Work Manager session.

    You may need to adjust your browser settings in order for browser pop-up notifications to appear. If you need to do this, you will be alerted in the Notifications Centre.

    To adjust your browser settings, go to Settings > Privacy and Security > Site Settings > Permissions > Notifications and adjust the settings to ensure that sites can send notifications to your browser.

    Email notifications will be sent to the email address that is .

    The address that the email will be sent from is .

    Email notifications will contain a link to the work item they relate to. If a user is already logged in to Enate, clicking on the link will take them straight to that work item. If the user has logged out, clicking on the link will take them to the Enate log in screen. Once they have logged in, they will be taken straight to the work item.

    In addition to seeing your notifications within the Work Manager Notifications Centre, as browser popups and via email, you can also set to see your browser popups within various parts of your Desktop, e.g. in your windows start menu and on your machine's lock screen.

    Sounds can also be turned all turned on within your desktop's notifications settings to allow for sounds to play whenever a desktop notification shows.

    You can choose to turn off ALL notifications by selecting this option in your User Settings tab at the top of the Notifications Settings section.

    While this option is switch on, no notifications will be generated for you. Your preferences will have been saved for when you want to turn notifications back on.

    The Action Screen

    The Action screen has the same overall layout as the Ticket and Case screen, and the same basic features including adding a note to a work item, sending an email, viewing the files and links attached and viewing the comms/timeline, but the Action screen also contains some Action-specific features.

    Action Title

    At the top of the Action screen, you'll see the title of the Action, made up of:

    Customer name - Contract name - Service name - Case Process name - Action Process name

    For example:

    The title of an Action is automatically set and is not editable.

    If the short description of the Action's Case has been edited, the changes to Case Short Description will be reflected in the Actions Screens of all the Case's Actions (you may need to refresh your Action screen for this to take immediate effect) and the title of the Action will be made up of:

    'Action Reference - Case Short Description - Action Process Name' '10040-C-A1.1 - Jack Jones new starter - HR Approval'

    This is the name that will be shown in the Action tab:

    The Case's short description is also the title that will also appear in the 'Title' column of the homepage grid for the Action.

    You can copy the Action's reference and number by clicking on the copy icon in the tab:

    The Action's due date will display, colour-coded to show if the date is:

    On schedule:

    Due today:

    Late:

    If an Action has been configured with an override due date option in Builder, then you will be able to override the due date of an Action by clicking on the due date in the header and changing the date in the popup.

    On a Manual with Peer Review Action that is currently with the reviewer, the due date you override is the peer review due date rather than the Action's own due date.

    You can also see whether or not the Action has been assigned, and who to.

    You are able to reassign and unassign an Action, or assign the Action to yourself if it has not been assigned to you already.

    See here for more information about assigning work in Enate:

    The status button sits in the header ribbon at the top of the Action screen, next to the Save Changes button. It shows an icon and the name of the status the Action is currently in, and it is colour-coded to that status. Click it to open the dropdown of statuses you can move the Action into.

    The dropdown always offers the same four statuses:

    • To Do

    • In Progress

    • Waiting

    • Resolved

    Closed only appears in the dropdown when the Action is already Closed, and it cannot be selected.

    Unlike a Ticket or a Case, an Action never sits in Draft. Enate creates Actions in a status of To Do.

    Selecting a status from the dropdown does not change the Action on its own. To change an Action's status:

    1. Click the status button in the header ribbon and select the new status.

    2. Fill in any further information the Info Card now asks for. Waiting asks for a wait type and its settings, Resolved asks for a resolution method and, for some outcomes, a comment.

    3. Click Save Changes in the header ribbon.

    The border of the Info Card highlights in a colour relating to the current status. Once you have clicked to save, the system will process the changes, and the border colour and new status will change to confirm that the status update has occurred.

    If you move the Action to In Progress, the Action tab stays open. For every other status the tab closes and you are returned to the page you came from. A label under the status tells you this in advance.

    Selecting a status also assigns the Action to you if nobody is working on it. The status button is disabled, and the Save Changes button is hidden, when:

    • The Action is assigned to another user. The Info Card shows 'Please assign this work item to yourself before making any changes.'

    • The Action is Resolved or Closed. Actions cannot be reopened.

    • The Action is a Manual with Peer Review Action that is with the reviewer, and you are the person who did the work. You cannot review your own work.

    • The Action is a Manual with Peer Review Action that is with the reviewer, and your Work Manager role does not include the 'Peer review Action Full Access' permission.

    If your Work Manager role does not include the 'Assign work item to self' permission and the Action is unassigned, selecting a status has no effect and the message 'Work item cannot be auto-assigned to you at the moment.' appears.

    See here for more information about processing an Action:

    While an Action is in To Do, In Progress or Waiting, the Info Card shows:

    Field
    Description

    Once the Action is Resolved or Closed, the Info Card shows Resolved By, Reason, Date/Time and Resolution Method instead. On a Manual with Peer Review Action it also shows Performed By, Reviewed By, the review outcome and the reviewer's comment.

    The Info Card also carries warnings where they apply, for example 'Peer Review failed because:' with the reviewer's comment, or 'Email failed to auto-send'.

    The Settings Card shows you detailed information about the Action, including:

    • The Action's context (Customer>Contract>Service>Case Process). This cannot be modified.

    • Action Instructions

    • The Action's parent Case, a link to the parent Case and a symbol showing the state of the Case

    • When the Action was created and who by

    The is where you can specify the people who relate to the Action.

    By default, the available relationships are:

    • Primary Contact: the main person you are dealing with for this Action.

    • Requester: the person that raised the initial request.

    • Subject: who the Action is about (this may be neither of the above).

    Very often all three will be the same person.

    • CCs: any further contacts which can be copied on any correspondence. When a contact is tagged only as 'CC', it will be displayed in the separate CCs section (hidden until any CC-only contacts exist on the work item.

    An Action's contacts will usually be auto-populated as the same as the contacts for the parent Case. However, if the Action's contacts are not auto-populated or if you want to add a different contact to the Action, you can add contacts to the Action manually by searching for them in the . This change will also be reflected in the Case's contacts too.

    If you search for a user in the contacts card that does not exist in the system, you can create a new contact by clicking on the 'Create Contact' option and filling in the contact's details.

    If you have written the email address for the contact, the system will decode and auto-populate the first name and last name of the contact. Once you fill in all the information and click on create contact, the system will redirect you back to the work item.

    When you manually add a contact they will be set as the Primary Contact, Requester and Subject by default. You can manually reassign these tags to other users afterwards.

    A contact that was created automatically from an email address, and still shows the email address in place of a name, blocks any status change until you give it a name.

    To help you manage activity against your SLAs, Enate allows users to track the time it takes for work items to be completed, both as an overall total and broken out by the various resources who may have worked on it.

    The Time Tracker Card in work items tracks the time of each individual browser session that the item is worked on.

    See here for more information about time tracking:

    Additionally, a Custom Card can be configured to display custom data..

    See here for more information:

    When you're working on a Ticket, Action or Case, operational issues can occur which have an effect on how you're able to deliver the process. It is important to record these as a way to highlight them for others who may view or work on the item, and to help with longer term efforts to improve process delivery.

    Watch this video to find out more about recording defects in Enate.

    You can also go to the dedicated article to find out more:

    Any defect you have added must have a category, a description and a party at fault before you can save a status change.

    Some Actions have a checklist section. This shows the checks which are required for this Action, defined during its .

    In order to mark an Action as complete, you must confirm for each item in the checklist whether you have completed it (the options are Yes, No, N/A) and you may need to add a note for each check.

    You can also see the name of the person who last updated the item in the checklist and when this update was made.

    If issues have occurred during the running of a Case you may wish to rework the Case. You can do this from an Action by selecting the 'Rework' tab from the Action screen.

    Rework is only offered while the Action is in a status of To Do, In Progress or Waiting.

    See here to find out more about reworking a Case from an Action:

    Most often the Actions in a Case are started automatically (either by process flow or based on schedules). However, if an Action has been configured to be manually startable, you can do this from an Action using the 'Start Action' feature.

    This option is only offered while the Action is in a status of To Do, In Progress or Waiting.

    See here to find out more about manually launching an Action from an Action:

    When a new email has come in for the Action that hasn't been read yet, the New Information icon will be highlighted. Clicking on it shows you when the new email was received.

    You can choose to mark the new information as read which will set the New Information icon back to normal. You can also mark the information as unread by clicking on the 'Mark as New' option.

    If the Action was waiting for more information, the arrival of new information moves it back to To Do. If the parent Case was also waiting for more information, the Case moves to In Progress at the same time.

    You can view how the Case that the Action belongs to is progressing by clicking on the map icon. will bring up the Case progress popup. This displays the progress made on steps in the Case, showing completed steps in green, the current step in orange and future steps in grey.

    This provides a link to the Standard Operating Procedure for the work item that has been set in Builder.

    Timeline and Comms

    The timeline shows the history of activity that has taken place for a work item in a chronological list. It is divided into the which shows the communications history for the work item and the which shows all of the activity that has taken place for the work item. See the following video for more information.

    below you will find a full list of icons that can appear in a Work Items Timeline:

    General Settings | Enate Helpdocs.enate.net

    Activity

    StartDate

    Work Item activity Start Date in date time format

    Activity

    StartDate_date

    Work Item activity Start Date in date only format

    Activity

    User Name

    User who performed the activity

    Context

    Contract

    Name of the Contract

    Context

    Customer

    Name of the Customer

    Context

    Service

    Name of the Service

    Context

    Supplier

    Name of the Supplier

    Date

    Date

    Calendar range of dates for filtering data

    Date

    Month

    Months of the dates

    Date

    Week

    Weeks of the dates

    Date

    Year

    Year of the dates

    Defects

    Work Item Count

    Count of work items that have defects against them

    Defects

    Date Raised

    Date on which the defect was raised for a Work Item

    Defects

    Defect Category

    Category of the defect

    Defects

    Desciption

    Description of the defect

    Defects

    Status

    Stated whether the defect is resolved or not

    Process

    Process

    Name of the process each Work Item belongs to

    Process

    Work Item Type

    Type of the Work Item (Ticket, Action or Case)

    Queues

    Queue

    Name of the queue the Work Item was last present in

    Status

    Status

    Work Item Status (To Do, In Progress, Waiting , Resolved , Closed)

    Status Reason

    Status Reason

    Reason behind the status change of the Work Item (Newly Created, new Info Received, Blocked by Business rule etc.)

    Wait Status History

    Waiting each Day

    Count of Work Items that are set to waiting status on a particular day by a user (out of the Work Items he/she working/worked on)

    Wait Status History

    EndDate

    End Date in Date time format when Work Item was in waiting state

    Wait Status History

    EndDate_date

    End Date in Date only format when Work Item was in waiting state

    Wait Status History

    StartDate

    Start Date in Date time format when Work Item was in waiting state

    Wait Status History

    StartDate_date

    Start Date in Date only format when Work Item was in waiting state

    Wait Status History

    User Name

    User who set the status of Work Item to Waiting

    Work Items

    Action

    Sum of Closed and Waiting work items on a particular day by a user

    Work Items

    Work Items Assigned Today

    Count of Work Items that are assigned to the a user today

    Work Items

    Work Items Closed

    Total Work Items closed by a user for the selected date range

    Work Items

    Work Items Closed Today

    Count of Work Items that are closed by a user today

    Work Items

    Work Items Due Today

    Count of Work Items that are due today by a user

    Work Items

    Work Items Open

    Total Work Items that are Open by a user

    Work Items

    Work Items Overdue

    Total Work Items that are Overdue by a user

    Work Items

    Work Items Reopened

    Total Tickets that are reopened for the a user

    Work Items

    Work Items Resolved

    Total Work Items that are Resolved by a user for the selected date range

    Work Items

    Work Items Started

    Total Work Items started by a user for the selected date range

    Work Items

    Ageing In Days

    Aeing in calendar days. For completed Work Items its (end date - start date), for open items its (today - start date).

    Work Items

    Count of Affected Records

    Records affected count

    Work Items

    Count of Defects

    Count of defects each Work Item has (if any)

    Work Items

    Count of Rework

    Count of rework each Work Item has (if any)

    Work Items

    DueDate

    Work Item Due Date in date time format

    Work Items

    DueDate_date

    Work Item Due Date in date only format

    Work Items

    EndDate

    Work Item End Date in date time format

    Work Items

    EndDate_date

    Work Item End Date in date only format

    Work Items

    Has Defects

    Whether the Work Item has defect or not (Yes or No)

    Work Items

    Reference

    Reference number of each Work Item

    Work Items

    Is Reopened

    Tickets that got opened after going to resolved status

    Work Items

    SLA

    Service Level Agreement to indicate where Work Item is Overdue or not

    Work Items

    StartDate

    Work Item Start Date in date time format

    Work Items

    Start Date_date

    Work Item Start Date in date only format

    Work Items

    Title

    Title of the Work Item

    Activity

    Total Hrs Logged

    Total time (in Hrs) spent by a user on all the Work Items he/she worked on for the selected date range

    Activity

    Activity Type

    Type of the activity performed on the Work Item by a user ('Save' or 'Complete')

    Activity

    Duration in Sec

    Time spent (in seconds) on the Work Item by a user. Manually entered time is considered if available.

    Logo
    Description

    Activity

    Active Users

    Count of users who are active on a selected date

    Activity

    Total Hrs Logged

    Total time in hours spent by a user on all the Work Items they worked on for the selected date range

    Activity

    Total Users

    Total number of users responsible for all the Work Items in a Queue

    Work Items Open by Ageing Category

    Work item Count by Defect Category & Status

    Total Number of Users & Active Users by Month

    Available Data Fields for User Insights

    This option is switched on by default for Team Leaders.

    Assigned user of a work item has changed to me

    Only the person the work item is being assigned to will receive the notification.

    New Work Item into Queue

    Assigned Queue of a work item has changed to a Queue that I am in and/or manage

    New File Added

    A new file has been manually uploaded by a user to the files tab of the work item

    Users subscribed to receive notifications for a work item related to this (e.g. Case/Actions or the child/parent of a split Ticket) will also receive the notification.

    Due Date 'At Risk' Reminder

    Due date of the work item is deemed to be at risk. This is calculated by subtracting the expected time for the work item to take with an additional 30 minutes from the due date/time.

    E.g. if the work item is due to be completed at 17.00 and the time expected to complete the work item is 1 hour, the Due Date 'At Risk' Reminder will be sent at 15.30.

    Note that this notification will not be sent if:

    • the work item is in a state of Draft

    • the work item is in a state of In Progress and assigned to a user

    Work Item is Overdue

    The due date of the work item has been missed and it is now overdue.

    Anyone subscribed to receive notifications for the parent of this work item (if there is one) will also receive this notification.

    Action Rejected

    A robot has actively rejected an Action, or repeatedly failed to process it

    Anyone subscribed to receive notifications for the parent Case of the Action will also receive this notification.

    Case Needs Attention

    A Case has encountered a problem and requires intervention before it can proceed.

    Users subscribed to receive notifications for a work item Related to this (e.g. Case/Actions or the child/parent of a split Ticket) will also receive the notification. Note that the person who rejected the Action within the Case will not receive the notification.

    Peer Review Changes

    The peer review of an Action has been marked as 'Passed', 'Failed', or 'Unable to be Completed'.

    Note that in order to receive this notification, users must:

    • be in the Queue that this Action belongs to (or manage it), AND

    • be subscribed to receive notifications about this Action (being subscribed to the Case is not enough), AND

    • have the setting to receive notifications from 'My Queues' switched on.

    Additionally, the person who completed the peer review will not receive the notification.

    My Work Inbox

    You will receive notifications for work items that are in your work inbox i.e. work items that are assigned to you.

    This is switched on by default for all users.

    My Queues

    New Information Received

    A new email or Self Service Note has been received on the work item

    Users subscribed to receive notifications for a work item in its related group to this (e.g. Case/Actions or the child/parent of a split Ticket) will also receive the notification.

    Getting notifications on Individual Work Items

    Following a Work Item

    Points to note:

    • You can follow a work item in any state except Draft and Closed.

    • You can only follow work items that you have permissions on.

    • You will never automatically be set to following an individual work item.

    • You can only follow an individual work item by manually clicking to follow it from its work item screen. The one exception to this rule is when you're following a Ticket and that Ticket is subsequently set to . In that circumstance you will automatically be set to follow all the Tickets that the original was split into.

    • When you click to follow a work item, you will only be set to following that work item and not work items that are related to it e.g. other Actions in a Case, or any.

    • If you choose to follow an Action and that Action's parent Case gets reworked, you will not be notified when that Action automatically closes as part of the rework, and you will not automatically follow that Action when the new one is relaunched from the new Case. If you want to follow the Action again, you can select to do so manually.

    Unfollowing a Work Item

    You can only unfollow a work item by manually clicking to unfollow it or if the work item moves to a state of Closed. When a work item moves to Closed, all of the users who were following it will be set to unfollow.

    Customising Notifications

    Which Items to notify me about - Scope

    Which Events to notify me about

    Note that you will only ever receive one notification about the same event for a work item.

    How to notify me - different types of Notifications

    Notifications Centre

    Mute Notifications - Do Not Disturb

    Notifications will be sent in the user's preferred language. If a user switches to a different language, all previous notifications will remain in the previous language, but any new notifications will appear in the new preferred language.

    Browser Pop-Up Notifications

    Allowing Popup notifications in your Browser

    Note that if Do Not Disturb is on, email notifications and browser pop-up notifications will be disabled and will no longer appear until Do Not Disturb has been switched off. Additionally, browser pop-up notifications will not appear when the browser is in incognito mode.

    Email Notifications

    Note that if Do Not Disturb is on, email notifications and browser pop-up notifications will be disabled and will no longer appear until Do Not Disturb has been switched off.

    Desktop Notifications

    How to see Desktop Notifications

    Sounds for Desktop Notifications

    Turn off all Notifications

    Note: If and when you choose to resume notifications, the system will begin to generate new notifications for you but any which would have been generated in the interim period will not be retrospectively created.

    events you have selected in your Notification Settings
    chosen to also be notified by browser pop-up and /or email
    User Settings
    Notification Settings
    Work Inbox
    Queues
    Notifications Centre
    email
    browser pop-up
    User Settings
    Notification Settings
    configured for users in Builder
    Unmonitored Email Address that has been configured in Builder

    You will receive notifications for work items that are in Queues that you are in and/or manage.

    Work Item Assigned to Me

    Last Updated By

    Who last changed data on the Action.

    Last Updated On

    When data was last changed on the Action. Shown in place of Last Updated By when no user has updated the Action.

    Started By

    The user, or the method, that created the Action, with the date and time.

    Initial Request

    The start date of the original request, when the Action was created from another work item.

    Parent

    The Action's parent Case, with a link to it and a symbol showing the state of the Case.

    If this Action was created from another work item, the initial request date shows the start date of the original request, allowing you to capture the entire length of time it has taken to complete a request.

  • Keep with me: users who have this option selected will be auto assigned as the work item's owner or assignee. This can still be changed manually.

  • Record Count: depending on configuration for the Action in Builder, the record count may or may not be displayed here. If it is, the record count is editable. If you update the record count for an Action, it will update the record count for future Actions but not previous Actions that have been closed.

  • Status Set By

    The user or robot who set the current status. Not shown when the system set it.

    Reason

    Why the status changed.

    Date/Time

    Note that the Case Short Description cannot be edited directly from an Action.

    Due Date

    Override Due Date

    Assignee

    Changing an Action's Status

    Confirming the change

    Until you click Save Changes, the status has not changed. Leaving the Action without saving leaves it in its previous status.

    What happens to the tab

    When you cannot change the status

    Status information in the Info Card

    Note that not all of the above information will be displayed every time, the information that is shown depends on the status of the Action and how the Action has been configured in Builder.

    Side Panel

    Viewing an Action's Settings

    Action's Contacts

    Note: it is possible to add further relationship types into the system. See here for more information on how to add contact tags.

    Time Tracking

    Custom Card

    Defects Card and Recording Defects

    Checklists

    Activities Launched from the Action Screen

    Reworking a Case

    Starting an Action Manually

    Further Info on Action Screen

    New Information Received

    Viewing Case Progress

    If you do not want any percentages to show here, simply leave them blank when configuring the Case's steps in Builder.

    Standard Operating Procedure

    Assigning / Reassigning / Unassigning Work
    Processing an Action
    contacts card
    Contacts Card
    Time Tracking
    Custom Cards
    Defects Card and Recording Defects
    configuration in Builder
    Reworking a Case
    Manually Launching An Action

    When the Action entered its current status.

    This icon means the Work Item status was changed to Resolved

    This icon means that the Work Item status was set to Draft

    This icon means that the Work Item status was set to To Do

    This icon means that the Work Item status was set to Wait

    This icon means that the Work Item status was set to In progress

    This icon means a note was added to the Work Item

    This icon means either the Work Item has been moved to a different Queue or Reassigned to a different user.

    This icon means that the Ticket Category was set / changed

    This icon means that the Work Item was re-opened

    This icon means that the Work Item was added to a Queue

    This icon means the Work Item due date was changed

    This icon means a email was sent out from the Work Item

    This icon means the Work Item received an incoming email

    This icon means that the Work Item's due date was missed

    This icon means system generated activity

    This icon means the Work Item was Reworked

    This icon means an Action was completed on a Case

    This icon means that a Email Attachment was deleted

    The Comms tab shows the communications history for a work item, such as emails, log activity and notes. For Tickets and Actions, the timeline section will display the Comms tab by default.

    The communications will be displayed in chronological order with the most recent at the top and the most recent email communication will be auto expanded by default. You can expand items to view them in more detail.

    Incoming communications which have arrived on the work item since it was last accessed by a user will display on the timeline with a green dot to make you aware of the new communications. The green dots will clear after any manual update is made to the work item and you hit ‘Submit’. The system does not clear the green dots based purely on the work item being viewed, as it could be viewed by multiple parties. Instead, in order to ensure that the user tasked with working on this item is aware of such recent updates an explicit update to the work item is needed before the green dot will clear.

    Additionally, if another Ticket has been merged into the work item you are currently viewing, any communications from that now merged Ticket will initially display on the timeline highlighted with green dots to make you aware of the new relevant communications. These will again clear the next time the work item is manually updated.

    You can choose which communications you wish to see on the comms timeline by clicking on the filter icon.

    The number next to the filter icon lets you know how many types of communications you are able to see out of the total number of types of communications available.

    You can choose to filter the Comms tab by the following communications:

    • Cancelled - this shows emails that have been cancelled, when they were cancelled and who they were cancelled by

    • Failed - this will shows emails that have failed to send and why they failed to send. Note that you can try to resend failed emails from the Timeline section by clicking the 'Retry' option.​

    • Incoming - this will shows emails coming in from a third party, when they arrived and who they were sent by

    • Outgoing - this will shows emails going out to a third party, when they were send and who they were sent by.

    • Scheduled - this will shows emails that are scheduled to send at a later date, when the emails are scheduled to send and who and who set the schedule. You also have the option to send the email now or to cancel the email from the Timeline. Additionally, when an Undo Send time is set, the option to send emails straight away or to cancel sending the email

      will appear in the Timeline during the Undo Send period (see here for more information about the Undo Send option) when scheduled emails are set to appear in the Timeline.​

    • Log Activity

      • Incoming and outgoing phone calls

      • Incoming and outgoing letters

    • Notes - this shows the notes that have been added to the work item

    • Self Service - this shows communications entered by self Service Users

    • (If the work item is a Ticket) Ticket Initial Description - this shows the initial description under which a Ticket was submitted

    When this is switched on, the comms tab will display communications not just from this work item, but for all related work items.

    When a related work item appears on the timeline, its reference will be displayed in the timeline.

    When switched on, system-generated communications such as auto-created submission confirmation emails which Enate sends out will be displayed. This option is off by default.

    The timeline tab shows the all of the activity history that has taken place for a work item, such as allocation changes, status changes and information about the quality of the work item, as well as all of the communications information that is also displayed in the comms tab.

    The items will be displayed on the timeline in chronological order with the most recent at the top.

    You can choose which activities you wish to see on the timeline by clicking on the filter icon.

    The number next to the filter icon lets you know how many types of communications you are able to see out of the total number of types of communications available.

    In addition to all the communication options, you can choose to filter the timeline tab by the following information:

    Allocations

    • Queues ​- when the work item has moved to a different Queue

    • Reassignments - the shows when the work item has been reassigned to another user

    Ticket Description (Ticket Only)

    If a user has written an initial description of a Ticket, the timeline will display the written description.

    Case Rework History (Cases Only)

    If a Case has been set to rework, the timeline will show who set the Case to rework, when it was set to rework, and the Step number and Action it was set to rework from.

    Email Attachment Deletion

    This shows when an email attachment has been deleted. It includes the file name of the email attachment that was deleted, the subject of the email it was attached to, who deleted it and when it was deleted.

    Quality

    • Due Date Missed - this shows when the due date for the work item has been missed

    • Due Date Changed - when the due date of the work item, the timeline will show when it has been changed to, who changed it and when they changed it

    • this shows when the work item status was changed, what is was changed from and to (e.g. status changed from In Progress to Resolved), who it was changed by and the reason it was changed. The icon on the left will reflect the status the work item was changed to.

    • If the status has changed to Wait, the Timeline will also show the Wait type

    • If the status has changed to Resolved, the Timeline will also show the Resolution Method

    • when a Peer-Review Action is in the peer review stage

    • If a Case has a problem

    Include Related Work Items

    When this is switched on, the timeline will display information not just from this work item, but for all related work items.

    When a related work item appears on the timeline, its reference will be displayed underneath the icon.

    When switched on, system-generated timeline entries such as auto-created submission confirmation emails which Enate sends out will be displayed. This option is off by default.

    You can view when work items have been reopened from a resolved state in the timeline, as well as when it was reopened and by whom.

    If a work item has been reopened as a result of an email, 'System' will be shown as who reopened the work item, so make sure that the 'Include System-Generated Activities' option in the comms/timeline filter is enabled to see these timeline entries.

    If a work item has been reopened by a user, make sure the 'status changes' option from the timeline filter is enabled to see these timeline entries.

    The information about who last reopened it and when is also shown explicitly on the work item info card.

    This icon means initial Ticket description

    Timeline Icons

    Comms Tab
    Timeline Tab

    Comms Tab

    Filtering the Comms Tab

    Email

    Include related work items

    • This setting is switched on by default for Cases so that when viewing a Case, you will also be able to see communications for all of its corresponding Actions.

    • This option is switched off by default for Tickets and Actions, so they will default to only displaying communications from this work item.

    Include system generated items

    Timeline Tab

    Filtering the Timeline Tab

    Status Changes

    • This setting is switched on by default for Cases so that when viewing a Case, you will also be able to see information about all of its corresponding Actions.

    • This option is switched off by default for Tickets and Actions, so they will default to only displaying information from this work item.

    Include System-Generated Activities

    Viewing Reopened Work Items

    The Case is running and its Actions are being launched.

    Waiting

    The Case is paused. No new Actions are launched.

    Resolved

    All the work is complete and the feedback window is open.

    Closed

    The Case is finished.

    The Case is not on its last step, or work is still outstanding.

    Complete

    Finishes the Case.

    The Case is on its last step with no running Actions and all steps and Actions completed.

    Always.

    The Ticket Screen

    The Ticket screen has the same overall layout as the and screen, and the same basic features including to a work item, , viewing the and viewing the , but it also contains some Ticket-specific features. Watch this video to find out more:

    At the top of the Ticket screen, you'll see the title of the Ticket.

    Depending on Builder settings, this may be editable throughout the duration of a Ticket. While a Ticket is in a status of Draft the title can always be edited, whatever the Builder setting says.

    The title of the Ticket that will appear at the top of the Ticket's tab.

    And the title will appear in the 'Title' column of the homepage grid for the Ticket.

    You can copy the Ticket's reference and number by clicking on the copy icon in the tab:

    Activity

    Activity Type

    The type of activity performed on the Work Item by a user (e.g. 'Saved' or 'Completed')

    Activity

    Duration in Sec

    Time spent in seconds on a Work Item by a user. Manually entered time is considered if available.

    Activity

    StartDate

    The Work Item activity Start Date in date/time format

    Activity

    StartDate_date

    The Work Item activity Start Date in date only format

    Activity

    User Name

    The user who performed the activity

    Context

    Contract

    The name of the contract

    Context

    Customer

    The name of the customer

    Context

    Service

    The name of the service

    Context

    Supplier

    The name of the supplier

    Date

    Date

    Calendar range of dates for filtering data

    Date

    Month

    Months of the dates

    Date

    Week

    Weeks of the dates

    Date

    Year

    Year of the dates

    Defects

    Work Item Count

    Number of Work Items that have defects

    Defects

    Date Raised

    Date on which the defect was raised for a Work Item

    Defects

    Defect Category

    Category of the defect

    Defects

    Description

    Description of the defect

    Defects

    Status

    States whether the defect is resolved or not

    Feedback

    Avg. rating

    Average of ratings for each Work Item

    Feedback

    Rating

    User rating for each Work Item

    Feedback

    Reference

    Reference number of a Work Item that has feedback

    Process

    Process

    Name of the process each Work Item belongs to

    Process

    Work Item Type

    Type of the Work Item (Ticket, Action or Case)

    Queues

    Queue

    Name of the queue the Work Item was last present in

    Status

    Status

    Work Item Status (To Do, In Progress, Waiting , Resolved , Closed)

    Status Reason

    Status Reason

    Reason behind the status change of the Work Item (Newly Created, new Info Received, Blocked by Business rule etc.)

    Wait Status History

    Waiting each Day

    Count of Work Items that are set to waiting status on a particular day by the user (out of the Work Items he/she working/worked on)

    Wait Status History

    EndDate

    End Date in Date time format when Work Item was in waiting state

    Wait Status History

    EndDate_date

    End Date in Date only format when Work Item was in waiting state

    Wait Status History

    StartDate

    Start Date in Date time format when Work Item was in waiting state

    Wait Status History

    StartDate_date

    Start Date in Date only format when Work Item was in waiting state

    Wait Status History

    User Name

    User who set the status of Work Item to Waiting

    Work Items

    Action

    Sum of Closed and Waiting work items on a particular day by a user

    Work Items

    Work Items Assigned Today

    Count of Work Items that are assigned to the user today

    Work Items

    Work Items Closed

    Total Work Items closed by a user for the selected date range

    Work Items

    Work Items Closed Today

    Count of Work Items that are closed by a user today

    Work Items

    Work Items Due Today

    Count of Work Items that are due today by a user

    Work Items

    Work Items Open

    Total Work Items that are Open by a user

    Work Items

    Work Items Overdue

    Total Work Items that are Overdue by a user

    Work Items

    Work Items Reopened

    Total Tickets that are reopened for the a user

    Work Items

    Work Items Resolved

    Total Work Items that are Resolved by a user for the selected date range

    Work Items

    Work Items Started

    Total Work Items started by a user for the selected date range

    Ageing Category

    Grouping of Aging in Days into different buckets

    Work Items

    Ageing In Days

    Ageing in calendar days. For completed Work Items its (end date - start date), for open items its (today - start date).

    Work Items

    Count of Affected Records

    Records affected count

    Work Items

    Count of Defects

    Count of defects each Work Item has (if any)

    Work Items

    Count of Rework

    Count of rework each Work Item has (if any)

    Work Items

    DueDate

    Work Item Due Date in date time format

    Work Items

    DueDate_date

    Work Item Due Date in date only format

    Work Items

    EndDate

    Work Item End Date in date time format

    Work Items

    EndDate_date

    Work Item End Date in date only format

    Work Items

    Has Defects

    Whether the Work Item has defect or not (Yes or No)

    Work Items

    Is Reopened

    Tickets that got opened after going to resolved status

    Work Items

    Reference

    Reference number of each Work Item

    Resolved Date

    Work Item resolved date in date/time format

    Resolved Date_date

    Work Item resolved date in date format

    Work Items

    SLA

    Service Level Agreement to indicate where Work Item is Overdue or not

    Work Items

    StartDate

    Work Item Start Date in date time format

    Work Items

    Start Date_date

    Work Item Start Date in date only format

    Work Items

    Title

    Title of the Work Item

    the work item is in a state of Waiting AND its due date has been configured with the option 'Add Wait Time To Due Date'

    Anyone subscribed to receive notifications for the parent of this work item (if there is one) will also receive this notification.

    split
    linked work items
    The one exception is when merging a Ticket, any Tickets which were closed due to merging will default to display the information from the downstream related Ticket.

    The Ticket's due date will display, colour-coded to show if the date is:

    On schedule:

    Due today:

    Late:

    If a Ticket has been configured with an override due date option in Builder, then you will be able to override the due date of a Ticket by clicking on the due date in the header and changing the date in the popup.

    When a Ticket is in a status of Waiting with a wait type of 'Wait for more information', and the Ticket's Due Date rule has 'Add Wait Time To Due Date' set to On, the due date is hidden while the Ticket waits. In its place the system shows the time that was left when the Ticket was put into that status.

    You can also see whether or not the Ticket has been assigned, and who to.

    You are able to reassign and unassign an Ticket, or assign the Ticket to yourself if it has not been assigned to you already.

    See here for more information about assigning work in Enate:

    The status button sits in the header ribbon at the top of the Ticket screen, next to the Save Changes button. It shows an icon and the name of the status the Ticket is currently in, and it is colour-coded to that status. Click it to open the dropdown of statuses you can move the Ticket into.

    The dropdown always offers the same four statuses:

    • To Do

    • In Progress

    • Waiting

    • Resolved

    Closed only appears in the dropdown when the Ticket is already Closed, and it cannot be selected. You move a Ticket to Closed by resolving it, not by choosing Closed.

    Draft is not offered in the dropdown either. A manually created Ticket starts in Draft and leaves Draft the first time you save it.

    Selecting a status from the dropdown does not change the Ticket on its own. To change a Ticket's status:

    1. Click the status button in the header ribbon and select the new status.

    2. Fill in any further information the Info Card now asks for. Waiting asks for a wait type and its settings, Resolved asks for a resolution method.

    3. Click Save Changes in the header ribbon. On a Ticket that is still in Draft, this button reads Save.

    The border of the Info Card highlights in a colour relating to the current status. Once you have clicked to save, the system will process the changes, and the border colour and new status will change to confirm that the status update has occurred.

    When you save a move to To Do, Waiting, Resolved or Closed, a confirmation message appears, for example 'Ticket 10040-T successfully submitted as To Do'. Clicking the message reopens the Ticket. No confirmation message appears for a move to In Progress.

    If you move the Ticket to In Progress, the Ticket tab stays open. For every other status the tab closes and you are returned to the page you came from. A label under the status tells you this in advance.

    Selecting a status also assigns the Ticket to you if nobody is working on it. The status button is disabled, and the Save Changes button is hidden, when:

    • The Ticket is assigned to another user. The Info Card shows 'Please assign this work item to yourself before making any changes.'

    • The Ticket is Resolved or Closed. A Resolved Ticket can still be reopened, see Processing a Ticket.

    • The Ticket is Waiting on related work items, which happens after you split it or convert it into a Case. The Ticket resolves itself when the split Tickets or the launched Case resolve.

    If your Work Manager role does not include the 'Assign work item to self' permission and the Ticket is unassigned, selecting a status has no effect and the message 'Work item cannot be auto-assigned to you at the moment.' appears.

    See here for more information about processing a Ticket:

    While a Ticket is in Draft, To Do, In Progress or Waiting, the Info Card shows:

    Field
    Description

    Status Set By

    The user or robot who set the current status. Not shown when the system set it.

    Reason

    Why the status changed. See the table below.

    Date/Time

    Once the Ticket is Resolved or Closed, the Info Card shows Resolved By, Reason, Date/Time and Resolution Method instead.

    These are the reasons the system records against a Ticket's status:

    Reason
    When it is used

    Newly Created

    The Ticket has not been updated since it was created.

    Updated By Resource

    A user or a robot changed the status.

    Updated By Integration

    The Settings Card shows you detailed information about the Ticket, including:

    • The name of the Ticket process

    • The Ticket's context (Customer>Contract>Service>Ticket Process), plus the Ticket's category and sub categories. These can be modified by expanding the card

    Expanding the Settings Card will show you:

    • The name of the Ticket process

    • Editable versions of the Ticket's context (Customer>Contract>Service>Ticket Process), plus the Ticket's category and sub categories

    • When, how and who created the Ticket

    • If this Ticket was created from another work item, the initial request date shows the start date of the original request, allowing you to capture the entire length of time it has taken to complete a request.

    • Keep with me: users who have this option selected will be auto assigned as the work item's owner or assignee. This can still be changed manually.

    • Send Automated Emails: the option to send out automated emails e.g. Ticket acknowledgement emails to the Ticket's contacts.

    A Ticket cannot be saved, and therefore cannot leave Draft, until a Ticket category has been set here.

    Depending on if record count has been configured to be visible on a Ticket, users will also be able to see and interact with the record count on the Ticket Settings card.

    The Contacts Card is where you can specify the people who relate to the Ticket.

    By default, the available relationships are:

    • Primary Contact: the main person you are dealing with for this Ticket. This is mandatory for Tickets.

    • Requester: the person that raised the initial request. This is mandatory for Tickets.

    • Subject: who the Ticket is about (this may be neither of the above).

    Very often all three will be the same person.

    • CCs: any further contacts which can be copied on any correspondence. When a contact is tagged only as 'CC', it will be displayed in the separate CCs section (hidden until any CC-only contacts exist on the work item.

    Exactly one contact must be tagged as Primary Contact and exactly one as Requester before you can save any status change. There are two exceptions: a Ticket created as a linked work item, and a Ticket you are resolving as 'Rejected As Spam'.

    Auto-populating a Ticket's contacts

    When an email arrives from an address which is associated with a system user or an external contact which has been previously recorded in the system, then their details are automatically populated on the contacts tab when the Ticket is created by the system. They will automatically be tagged as the Requester, Subject and Primary Contact. These tags can be removed.

    Optionally the first operator to assess the Ticket can also set them as the Primary Contact if deemed appropriated by their assessment. If you tag another contact as any of these relationship types, the tag will be removed from the previous contact.

    Manually Populating a Ticket's Contact's

    A Ticket's contacts will usually be auto-populated from an initial email. However, if the Ticket's contacts are not auto-populated or if you want to add a different contact to the Ticket, you can add contacts to the Ticket manually by searching for them in the Contacts Card.

    If you search for a user in the Contacts Card that does not exist in the system, you can create a new contact by clicking on the 'Create Contact' option and filling in the contact's details.

    If you have written the email address for the contact, the system will decode and auto-populate the first name and last name of the contact. Once you fill in all the information and click on create contact, the system will redirect you back to the work item.

    When you manually add a contact they will be set as the Primary Contact, Requester and Subject by default. You can manually reassign these tags to other users afterwards.

    A contact that was created automatically from an email address, and still shows the email address in place of a name, blocks any status change until you give it a name.

    To help you manage activity against your SLAs, Enate allows users to track the time it takes for work items to be completed, both as an overall total and broken out by the various resources who may have worked on it.

    The Time Tracker Card in work items tracks the time of each individual browser session that the item is worked on.

    See here for more information about time tracking:

    Additionally, a Custom Card can be configured to display custom data.

    See here for more information:

    When you're working on a Ticket, Action or Case, operational issues can occur which have an effect on how you're able to deliver the process. It is important to record these as a way to highlight them for others who may view or work on the item, and to help with longer term efforts to improve process delivery.

    Watch this video to find out more about recording defects in Enate.

    You can also go to the dedicated article to find out more:

    Any defect you have added must have a category, a description and a party at fault before you can save a status change.

    If during processing of a Ticket query it becomes apparent that the request is better handled via a specific Case, you can support this by choosing to convert the Ticket into a Case. You can do this via the 'Convert to Case' option from the Ticket screen.

    The Ticket then moves to a status of Waiting on related work items and its tab closes. It resolves itself once the launched Case has been resolved.

    See here for more information:

    If an incoming email creates a new Ticket instead of auto-appending itself to an already existing request, you can merge the Ticket into the other work item. You do this by selecting the 'Merge' option from the Ticket screen.

    The Ticket you merge is resolved with a resolution method of 'Merged'.

    See here for more information:

    If a Ticket contains multiple separate queries / questions which are better managed separately you can split the Ticket. You do this by clicking on the Split option from the Ticket screen.

    The original Ticket then moves to a status of Waiting on related work items and resolves itself once all of the split Tickets have been resolved.

    See here for more information:

    When a new email or Self Service message has come in for a Ticket that hasn't been read yet, the New Information icon will be highlighted. Clicking on it shows you when the new information was received.

    You can choose to mark the new information as read which will set the New Information icon back to normal. You can also mark the information as unread by clicking on the 'Mark as New' option.

    Enate does not distinguish between an email and a Self Service message here. Either one sets the New Information icon, and either one can move the Ticket out of a wait for more information or reopen it during its feedback window.

    This provides a link to the Standard Operating Procedure for the work item that has been set in Builder.

    If the 'Allow Feedback' setting is ticked in Builder (see here for more information on how to do this), the Customer Feedback icon will appear in the Ticket's Header Ribbon.

    It will show you your current feedback rating as well as recent customer feedback. See here for more information about getting Customer Feedback.

    Ticket Title

    Case
    Action
    adding a note
    sending an email
    files and links attached
    comms/timeline

    Due Date

    Override Due Date

    Please note that if you change the category of the Ticket to a category that does not allow the option of overriding the due date, then the system will recalculate and use the due date that has been configured for that category in Builder.

    Assignee

    Changing a Ticket's Status

    Confirming the change

    Until you click Save Changes, the status has not changed. Leaving the Ticket without saving leaves it in its previous status.

    What happens to the tab

    When you cannot change the status

    Status information in the Info Card

    Note that not all of the above information will be displayed every time, the information that is shown depends on the status of the Ticket and how the Ticket has been configured in Builder.

    Side Panel

    Viewing a Ticket's Settings

    Ticket's Contacts

    Note: it is possible to add further relationship types into the system. See here for more information on how to .

    Populating a Ticket's Contacts Card

    Time Tracking

    Custom Card

    Defects Card and Recording Defects

    Activities Launched from the Ticket Screen

    Convert to a Case

    Merging a Ticket

    Splitting a Ticket

    Split, Merge and Convert to Case are only offered while the Ticket is in a status of To Do, In Progress, or Waiting with a wait type of 'Wait for more information' or 'Wait Until'. They are not offered on a Draft, Resolved or Closed Ticket, or on one that is already waiting on related work items.

    Further Info on Ticket Screen

    New Information Received

    Standard Operating Procedure

    Customer Feedback

    Assigning / Reassigning / Unassigning Work
    Processing a Ticket
    Time Tracking
    Custom Cards
    Defects Card and Recording Defects
    Converting a Ticket into a Case
    Merging a Ticket into another Ticket/Case/Action
    Splitting a Ticket

    The Case Screen

    The Case screen has the same overall layout as the Ticket and Action screen, and the same basic features including adding a note to a work item, sending an email, viewing the files and links attached and viewing the comms/timeline, but the Case screen also contains some Case-specific features.

    Case Title

    At the top of the Case screen, you'll see the context of the Case, made up of:

    Customer name - Contract name - Service name - Case Process Name

    For example:

    The Case short description is shown on the right-hand side of the screen. If the 'Allow Title Change' option has been selected in the Case Info tab in Builder, you will be able to edit the short description of the Case. While the Case is still in a status of Draft you can always edit it, whatever that setting says.

    This is the title that will then appear at the top of the Case's tab.

    This is the title that will also appear in the 'Title' column of the homepage grid.

    You can copy the Case's reference number and title by clicking on the copy icon in the tab:

    The Case screen display is laid out to emphasise visibility of the Actions which are run for it. To support this, an additional dedicated 'Actions' tab exists which allows you to quickly see the status of its Actions and to access them. This is the default displayed tab in this section for Cases.

    This tab shows the following information for any Actions under the Case:

    • Current State icon

    • Action reference number

    • Action title and instructions

    • Due Date, Assignee, Queue

    Actions will be displayed in order of:

    1. Status, with Actions in a status of To Do at the top, followed by Actions in a status of In Progress, then Waiting, then Resolved, then Closed. If all the statuses are the same, then the Actions will be displayed in order of:

    2. Due date, with the Actions due soonest at the top. If all the due dates are the same, then the Actions will be displayed in order of:

    3. Time remaining when paused, with the Action with the least amount of time remaining when paused at the top. If the time remaining when paused is the same for all the Actions, then the Actions will be displayed in order of:

    Sub Cases are created from an existing 'parent' Case that retain a link to their 'parent' Case will behave according to its own specific configuration, but its parent Case will not complete until all of its Sub Cases have completed.

    You can create Sub Cases by clicking on the '+ Work item' link shown near the tabs section of a Case and the choose the 'Sub Case' option from the dropdown.

    The Sub Cases tab will show the Sub Cases for that Case.

    If a Case reaches the end of its last step with its Actions complete but a Sub Case still running, the Case moves into a status of Waiting with a wait type of 'Related Work Items'. It resolves itself once the Sub Cases complete.

    See here for more information about Sub Cases:

    Another feature of the Case screen is the option to launch a Case or Ticket from the Case to create a 'Linked' relationship between the work items.

    Items created in this way will retain a link to the original Case / Ticket and will show on a within it, making it easy to track a group of work items which relate to each other.

    See here for more information:

    The Case's due date will display, colour-coded to show if the date is:

    On schedule:

    Due today:

    Late:

    If a Case has been configured with an override due date option in Builder, then you will be able to override the due date of a Case by clicking on the due date in the header and changing the date in the popup.

    You can also see whether or not the Case has been assigned, and who to.

    You are able to reassign and unassign an Case, or assign the Case to yourself if it has not been assigned to you already.

    See here for more information about assigning work in Enate:

    Please note that Cases behave differently to Actions and Tickets in terms of assignment and how they appear in a user's workload: Cases do not automatically assign to users in the same way that Actions and Tickets do, as the majority of operational work within a Case is carried out on its associated Actions. Cases will auto-assign to relevant users where work has been explicitly escalated or requires direct intervention by the Case Owner.

    As a result, Cases do not typically populate a user's Work Inbox, which is reserved for actionable items requiring immediate user input. Instead, Cases are visible in the Owned Work section, allowing users to retain ownership and oversight of the Case while focusing their inbox on active Actions and Tickets. In short: if you see a Case item in your Work Inbox, it will most likely be because something has happened at the Action level which needs your input or new information has been received at the Case level that you can review such as the merging of a Ticket to the Case or the arrival of an inbound email.

    The status button sits in the header ribbon at the top of the Case screen, next to the Save Changes button. It shows an icon and the name of the status the Case is currently in, and it is colour-coded to that status. Click it to open the dropdown of statuses you can move the Case into.

    The dropdown always offers the same four statuses:

    • To Do

    • In Progress

    • Waiting

    • Resolved

    Closed only appears in the dropdown when the Case is already Closed, and it cannot be selected. Draft is not offered either. A manually created Case starts in Draft and leaves Draft the first time you save it.

    Selecting a status from the dropdown does not change the Case on its own. To change a Case's status:

    1. Click the status button in the header ribbon and select the new status.

    2. Fill in any further information the Info Card now asks for. Waiting asks for a wait type and, for 'Wait For More Information', a wait reason. Resolved asks for a resolution method. Moving a Case that needs attention to In Progress asks you how to proceed.

    3. Click Save Changes in the header ribbon. On a Case that is still in Draft, this button reads Save.

    The border of the Info Card highlights in a colour relating to the current status. Once you have clicked to save, the system will process the changes, and the border colour and new status will change to confirm that the status update has occurred.

    When you save a move to To Do, Waiting, Resolved or Closed, a confirmation message appears, for example 'Case 10040-C successfully submitted as Waiting'. Clicking the message reopens the Case.

    If you move the Case to In Progress, the Case tab stays open. For every other status the tab closes and you are returned to the page you came from. A label under the status tells you this in advance.

    Selecting a status also assigns the Case to you if nobody is working on it. The status button is disabled, and the Save Changes button is hidden, when:

    • The Case is assigned to another user. The Info Card shows 'Please assign this work item to yourself before making any changes.'

    • The Case is Resolved or Closed. A Resolved Case can still be reopened if the Case has been configured to allow it.

    If your Work Manager role does not include the 'Assign work item to self' permission and the Case is unassigned, selecting a status has no effect and the message 'Work item cannot be auto-assigned to you at the moment.' appears.

    When something stops a Case progressing, Enate puts it into To Do and flags it as needing attention. The Info Card shows a warning reading 'Case needs attention', with a tooltip telling you that to progress the Case further you can rework from a previous Step or Action, set it to 'In Progress' manually, or pause the Case.

    Below the warning is a checkbox reading 'Issue resolved, allow the Case to continue'. Tick it to clear the flag. Until you do, the Case will not launch any Actions that are queued up waiting for it.

    When you move a Case that needs attention from To Do to In Progress, the Info Card asks 'How to proceed' and offers whichever of these apply:

    Option
    When it is offered

    See here for more information about processing a Case:

    While a Case is in Draft, To Do, In Progress or Waiting, the Info Card shows:

    Field
    Description

    Once the Case is Resolved or Closed, the Info Card shows Resolved By, Reason, Date/Time and Resolution Method instead.

    These are the reasons you will most often see against a Case's status:

    Reason
    When it is used

    The Settings Card shows you detailed information about the Case, including:

    • The context of the Case (Customer>Contract>Service>Case Process).

    • When, how and who created the Case

    • If this Case was created from another work item, the initial request date shows the start date of the original request, allowing you to capture the entire length of time it has taken to complete a request.

    • Keep with me: a user who is the owner of a Case will be alerted and assigned to the Case when new developments such as the arrival of an inbound email or the merging with a Ticket occurs. Once the user acknowledges the new information, they will be automatically unassigned from the Case, however they will still remain as the owner of the Case.

    The is where you can specify the people who relate to the Case.

    By default, the available relationships are:

    • Primary Contact: the main person you are dealing with for this Case. This is may or may not be mandatory for Cases, depending upon Case configuration in Builder.

    • Requester: the person that raised the initial request. This is may or may not be mandatory for Cases, depending upon Case configuration in Builder.

    • Subject: who the Case is about.

    Very often all three will be the same person.

    • CCs: any further contacts which can be copied on any correspondence. When a contact is tagged only as 'CC', it will be displayed in the separate CCs section (hidden until any CC-only contacts exist on the work item.

    Where contacts are mandatory for the Case, exactly one contact must be tagged as Primary Contact and exactly one as Requester before you can save any status change. A Case started from an email or a schedule that is missing its Primary Contact is flagged as needing attention rather than being blocked.

    A Case's Contacts Card will not usually be auto-populated, so you need to manually add a contact. You can do this by searching for a contact in the .

    If you search for a user in the Contacts Card that does not exist in the system, you can create a new contact by clicking on the 'Create Contact' option and filling in the contact's details.

    If you have written the email address for the contact, the system will decode and auto-populate the first name and last name of the contact. Once you fill in all the information and click on create contact, the system will redirect you back to the work item.

    When you manually add a contact they will be set as the Primary Contact, Requester and Subject by default. You can manually reassign these tags to other users afterwards.

    To help you manage activity against your SLAs, Enate allows users to track the time it takes for work items to be completed, both as an overall total and broken out by the various resources who may have worked on it.

    The Time Tracker Card in work items tracks the time of each individual browser session that the item is worked on.

    See here for more information about time tracking:

    Additionally, a Custom Card can be configured to display custom data..

    See here for more information:

    When you're working on a Ticket, Action or Case, operational issues can occur which have an effect on how you're able to deliver the process. It is important to record these as a way to highlight them for others who may view or work on the item, and to help with longer term efforts to improve process delivery.

    Watch this video to find out more about recording defects in Enate.

    You can also go to the dedicated article to find out more:

    Any defect you have added must have a category, a description and a party at fault before you can save a status change.

    If issues have occurred during the running of a Case you may wish to rework the Case. You can do this from the Case by selecting the 'Rework' tab from the Case screen.

    Rework is only offered while the Case is in a status of To Do, In Progress or Waiting, and only on Cases that are not configured to allow reopening.

    See here to find out more about reworking a Case:

    Most often the Actions in a Case are started automatically (either by process flow or based on schedules). However, if an Action has been configured to be manually startable, you can do this from the Case using the 'Start Action' feature.

    This option, along with 'Sub Case' on the '+ Work item' link, is only offered while the Case is in a status of To Do, In Progress or Waiting.

    See here to find out more about manually launching an Action from a Case:

    When a new email has come in for a Case that hasn't been read yet, the New Information icon will be highlighted. Clicking on it shows you when the new email was received.

    You can choose to mark the new information as read which will set the New Information icon back to normal. You can also mark the information as unread by clicking on the 'Mark as New' option.

    If the Case was waiting for more information, the arrival of new information moves it back to To Do. If the Case is Resolved and still inside its feedback window, new information reopens it into To Do.

    This provides a link to the Standard Operating Procedure for the work item that has been set in Builder.

    Let Users Personalize Visuals in a Report - Power BIMicrosoftLearn
    Let Users Personalize Visuals in a Report - Power BIMicrosoftLearn
    State in text form
    Step number, with the Action with the lowest step number at the top. If the step numbers are all the same, then the Actions will be displayed in order of:
  • Start Date/Time, with the Action with the most recent start date/time at the top. If the start date/time is the same for all the Actions, then the Actions will be displayed in order of:

  • Reference number

  • Keep Action with me: all future Actions within a Case will automatically be assigned to the user who has the "Keep Action with me" option selected.

  • Send Automated Emails: the option to send automated emails for the Case. At the moment, the only automated email available to send for cases is a Case creation acknowledgement email.

  • Record Count: depending on configuration for the Case in Builder, the record count may or may not be displayed here. If it is, the record count is editable.

  • If a schedule has been set for the Case, it will also be displayed on the settings card.

  • Resume

    One or more of the Case's Actions is still running.

    Move to Next Step

    The Case is not on its last step, or work is still outstanding.

    Complete

    Status Set By

    The user or robot who set the current status. Not shown when the system set it.

    Reason

    Why the status changed.

    Date/Time

    Newly Created

    The Case has not been updated since it was created.

    Updated By Resource

    A user or a robot changed the status.

    New Information Received

    Viewing the Actions of a Case

    Sub Cases

    Viewing Work Linked to a Case

    Due Date

    Override Due Date

    Assignee

    Case Assignment

    Changing a Case's Status

    Confirming the change

    Until you click Save Changes, the status has not changed. Leaving the Case without saving leaves it in its previous status.

    What happens to the tab

    When you cannot change the status

    Case needs attention

    Status information in the Info Card

    Note that not all of the above information will be displayed every time, the information that is shown depends on the status of the Case and how the Case has been configured in Builder.

    Side Panel

    Viewing the Settings of a Case

    Case's Contacts

    Note: it is possible to add further relationship types into the system. See here for more information on how to .

    Time Tracking

    Custom Card

    Defects Card and Recording Defects

    Activities Launched from the Case screen

    Reworking a Case

    Starting an Action Manually

    Further info on the Case screen

    New Information Received

    Standard Operating Procedure

    Sub Cases
    Links tab
    Working with Linked Work Items
    Assigning / Reassigning / Unassigning Work
    Processing a Case
    Contacts Card
    Contacts Card
    Time Tracking
    Custom Cards
    Defects Card and Recording Defects
    Reworking a Case
    Manually Launching An Action

    When the Ticket entered its current status.

    Last Updated By

    Who last changed data on the Ticket.

    Last Updated On

    When data was last changed on the Ticket. Shown in place of Last Updated By when no user has updated the Ticket.

    Last Reopened By

    The user who last reopened the Ticket, with the date and time. Only shown if the Ticket has been reopened.

    Started By

    The user, or the method, that created the Ticket, with the date and time.

    Initial Request

    The start date of the original request, when the Ticket was created from another work item.

    An integration changed the status.

    New Information Received

    An email or Self Service message arrived.

    Timeout

    A wait expired.

    Schedule Date and Time Reached

    A 'Wait Until' follow up date and time was reached.

    All Split Tickets Completed

    Every Ticket this Ticket was split into has been resolved.

    Feedback Window Passed

    The feedback window closed with no response.

    Blocked By Business Rule

    A business rule stopped the Ticket continuing.

    Updated By Enate

    The Enate system changed the status.

    Cancelled

    The Ticket was cancelled.

    Updated By Support Team

    A member of the support team changed the status.

    Unknown

    The information was not captured, usually because the Ticket predates an upgrade.

    add contact tags
    Logo
    Logo

    The Case is on its last step with no running Actions and everything completed.

    When the Case entered its current status.

    Last Updated By

    Who last changed data on the Case.

    Last Updated On

    When data was last changed on the Case. Shown in place of Last Updated By when no user has updated the Case.

    Last Reopened By

    The user who last reopened the Case, with the date and time. Only shown if the Case has been reopened.

    Started By

    The user, or the method, that created the Case, with the date and time.

    Initial Request

    The start date of the original request, when the Case was created from another work item.

    Linked Schedule

    The schedule period the Case belongs to, if it was started from a schedule.

    An email or Self Service message arrived.

    Schedule Date and Time Reached

    A 'Wait Until' follow up date and time was reached.

    Previous Step Completed

    A step finished and the Case uses manual step progression, or the next step is empty.

    All relevant Actions completed

    Every Action and Sub Case has completed.

    Action Unable To Complete

    An Action was resolved as 'Unable to Complete'.

    One or more Actions not completed successfully

    The Case finished its work but something did not complete cleanly.

    Sub Case Completed / Sub Case Cancelled

    A Sub Case finished or was cancelled.

    Sub Case Not Yet Started

    The Case is waiting for a Sub Case to start.

    Blocked By Business Rule

    A business rule stopped the Case continuing, for example a missing mandatory contact.

    Rework

    The Case was reworked.

    Cancelled

    The Case was cancelled.

    Updated By Enate

    The Enate system changed the status.

    add contact tags